diff options
author | Dmitry Torokhov <dtor_core@ameritech.net> | 2005-09-09 21:14:47 -0400 |
---|---|---|
committer | Dmitry Torokhov <dtor_core@ameritech.net> | 2005-09-09 21:14:47 -0400 |
commit | d344c5e0856ad03278d8700b503762dbc8b86e12 (patch) | |
tree | a6d893a643470a3c2580a58f3228a55fa1fd1d82 /Documentation | |
parent | 010988e888a0abbe7118635c1b33d049caae6b29 (diff) | |
parent | 87fc767b832ef5a681a0ff9d203c3289bc3be2bf (diff) |
Manual merge with Linus
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
59 files changed, 4185 insertions, 725 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index f28a24e0279b..f6de52b01059 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX | |||
@@ -46,6 +46,8 @@ SubmittingPatches | |||
46 | - procedure to get a source patch included into the kernel tree. | 46 | - procedure to get a source patch included into the kernel tree. |
47 | VGA-softcursor.txt | 47 | VGA-softcursor.txt |
48 | - how to change your VGA cursor from a blinking underscore. | 48 | - how to change your VGA cursor from a blinking underscore. |
49 | applying-patches.txt | ||
50 | - description of various trees and how to apply their patches. | ||
49 | arm/ | 51 | arm/ |
50 | - directory with info about Linux on the ARM architecture. | 52 | - directory with info about Linux on the ARM architecture. |
51 | basic_profiling.txt | 53 | basic_profiling.txt |
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt b/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..705f6be92bdb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ | |||
1 | DMA with ISA and LPC devices | ||
2 | ============================ | ||
3 | |||
4 | Pierre Ossman <drzeus@drzeus.cx> | ||
5 | |||
6 | This document describes how to do DMA transfers using the old ISA DMA | ||
7 | controller. Even though ISA is more or less dead today the LPC bus | ||
8 | uses the same DMA system so it will be around for quite some time. | ||
9 | |||
10 | Part I - Headers and dependencies | ||
11 | --------------------------------- | ||
12 | |||
13 | To do ISA style DMA you need to include two headers: | ||
14 | |||
15 | #include <linux/dma-mapping.h> | ||
16 | #include <asm/dma.h> | ||
17 | |||
18 | The first is the generic DMA API used to convert virtual addresses to | ||
19 | physical addresses (see Documentation/DMA-API.txt for details). | ||
20 | |||
21 | The second contains the routines specific to ISA DMA transfers. Since | ||
22 | this is not present on all platforms make sure you construct your | ||
23 | Kconfig to be dependent on ISA_DMA_API (not ISA) so that nobody tries | ||
24 | to build your driver on unsupported platforms. | ||
25 | |||
26 | Part II - Buffer allocation | ||
27 | --------------------------- | ||
28 | |||
29 | The ISA DMA controller has some very strict requirements on which | ||
30 | memory it can access so extra care must be taken when allocating | ||
31 | buffers. | ||
32 | |||
33 | (You usually need a special buffer for DMA transfers instead of | ||
34 | transferring directly to and from your normal data structures.) | ||
35 | |||
36 | The DMA-able address space is the lowest 16 MB of _physical_ memory. | ||
37 | Also the transfer block may not cross page boundaries (which are 64 | ||
38 | or 128 KiB depending on which channel you use). | ||
39 | |||
40 | In order to allocate a piece of memory that satisfies all these | ||
41 | requirements you pass the flag GFP_DMA to kmalloc. | ||
42 | |||
43 | Unfortunately the memory available for ISA DMA is scarce so unless you | ||
44 | allocate the memory during boot-up it's a good idea to also pass | ||
45 | __GFP_REPEAT and __GFP_NOWARN to make the allocater try a bit harder. | ||
46 | |||
47 | (This scarcity also means that you should allocate the buffer as | ||
48 | early as possible and not release it until the driver is unloaded.) | ||
49 | |||
50 | Part III - Address translation | ||
51 | ------------------------------ | ||
52 | |||
53 | To translate the virtual address to a physical use the normal DMA | ||
54 | API. Do _not_ use isa_virt_to_phys() even though it does the same | ||
55 | thing. The reason for this is that the function isa_virt_to_phys() | ||
56 | will require a Kconfig dependency to ISA, not just ISA_DMA_API which | ||
57 | is really all you need. Remember that even though the DMA controller | ||
58 | has its origins in ISA it is used elsewhere. | ||
59 | |||
60 | Note: x86_64 had a broken DMA API when it came to ISA but has since | ||
61 | been fixed. If your arch has problems then fix the DMA API instead of | ||
62 | reverting to the ISA functions. | ||
63 | |||
64 | Part IV - Channels | ||
65 | ------------------ | ||
66 | |||
67 | A normal ISA DMA controller has 8 channels. The lower four are for | ||
68 | 8-bit transfers and the upper four are for 16-bit transfers. | ||
69 | |||
70 | (Actually the DMA controller is really two separate controllers where | ||
71 | channel 4 is used to give DMA access for the second controller (0-3). | ||
72 | This means that of the four 16-bits channels only three are usable.) | ||
73 | |||
74 | You allocate these in a similar fashion as all basic resources: | ||
75 | |||
76 | extern int request_dma(unsigned int dmanr, const char * device_id); | ||
77 | extern void free_dma(unsigned int dmanr); | ||
78 | |||
79 | The ability to use 16-bit or 8-bit transfers is _not_ up to you as a | ||
80 | driver author but depends on what the hardware supports. Check your | ||
81 | specs or test different channels. | ||
82 | |||
83 | Part V - Transfer data | ||
84 | ---------------------- | ||
85 | |||
86 | Now for the good stuff, the actual DMA transfer. :) | ||
87 | |||
88 | Before you use any ISA DMA routines you need to claim the DMA lock | ||
89 | using claim_dma_lock(). The reason is that some DMA operations are | ||
90 | not atomic so only one driver may fiddle with the registers at a | ||
91 | time. | ||
92 | |||
93 | The first time you use the DMA controller you should call | ||
94 | clear_dma_ff(). This clears an internal register in the DMA | ||
95 | controller that is used for the non-atomic operations. As long as you | ||
96 | (and everyone else) uses the locking functions then you only need to | ||
97 | reset this once. | ||
98 | |||
99 | Next, you tell the controller in which direction you intend to do the | ||
100 | transfer using set_dma_mode(). Currently you have the options | ||
101 | DMA_MODE_READ and DMA_MODE_WRITE. | ||
102 | |||
103 | Set the address from where the transfer should start (this needs to | ||
104 | be 16-bit aligned for 16-bit transfers) and how many bytes to | ||
105 | transfer. Note that it's _bytes_. The DMA routines will do all the | ||
106 | required translation to values that the DMA controller understands. | ||
107 | |||
108 | The final step is enabling the DMA channel and releasing the DMA | ||
109 | lock. | ||
110 | |||
111 | Once the DMA transfer is finished (or timed out) you should disable | ||
112 | the channel again. You should also check get_dma_residue() to make | ||
113 | sure that all data has been transfered. | ||
114 | |||
115 | Example: | ||
116 | |||
117 | int flags, residue; | ||
118 | |||
119 | flags = claim_dma_lock(); | ||
120 | |||
121 | clear_dma_ff(); | ||
122 | |||
123 | set_dma_mode(channel, DMA_MODE_WRITE); | ||
124 | set_dma_addr(channel, phys_addr); | ||
125 | set_dma_count(channel, num_bytes); | ||
126 | |||
127 | dma_enable(channel); | ||
128 | |||
129 | release_dma_lock(flags); | ||
130 | |||
131 | while (!device_done()); | ||
132 | |||
133 | flags = claim_dma_lock(); | ||
134 | |||
135 | dma_disable(channel); | ||
136 | |||
137 | residue = dma_get_residue(channel); | ||
138 | if (residue != 0) | ||
139 | printk(KERN_ERR "driver: Incomplete DMA transfer!" | ||
140 | " %d bytes left!\n", residue); | ||
141 | |||
142 | release_dma_lock(flags); | ||
143 | |||
144 | Part VI - Suspend/resume | ||
145 | ------------------------ | ||
146 | |||
147 | It is the driver's responsibility to make sure that the machine isn't | ||
148 | suspended while a DMA transfer is in progress. Also, all DMA settings | ||
149 | are lost when the system suspends so if your driver relies on the DMA | ||
150 | controller being in a certain state then you have to restore these | ||
151 | registers upon resume. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl index 49a9ef82d575..6367bba32d22 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl | |||
@@ -8,8 +8,7 @@ | |||
8 | 8 | ||
9 | <authorgroup> | 9 | <authorgroup> |
10 | <author> | 10 | <author> |
11 | <firstname>Paul</firstname> | 11 | <firstname>Rusty</firstname> |
12 | <othername>Rusty</othername> | ||
13 | <surname>Russell</surname> | 12 | <surname>Russell</surname> |
14 | <affiliation> | 13 | <affiliation> |
15 | <address> | 14 | <address> |
@@ -20,7 +19,7 @@ | |||
20 | </authorgroup> | 19 | </authorgroup> |
21 | 20 | ||
22 | <copyright> | 21 | <copyright> |
23 | <year>2001</year> | 22 | <year>2005</year> |
24 | <holder>Rusty Russell</holder> | 23 | <holder>Rusty Russell</holder> |
25 | </copyright> | 24 | </copyright> |
26 | 25 | ||
@@ -64,7 +63,7 @@ | |||
64 | <chapter id="introduction"> | 63 | <chapter id="introduction"> |
65 | <title>Introduction</title> | 64 | <title>Introduction</title> |
66 | <para> | 65 | <para> |
67 | Welcome, gentle reader, to Rusty's Unreliable Guide to Linux | 66 | Welcome, gentle reader, to Rusty's Remarkably Unreliable Guide to Linux |
68 | Kernel Hacking. This document describes the common routines and | 67 | Kernel Hacking. This document describes the common routines and |
69 | general requirements for kernel code: its goal is to serve as a | 68 | general requirements for kernel code: its goal is to serve as a |
70 | primer for Linux kernel development for experienced C | 69 | primer for Linux kernel development for experienced C |
@@ -96,13 +95,13 @@ | |||
96 | 95 | ||
97 | <listitem> | 96 | <listitem> |
98 | <para> | 97 | <para> |
99 | not associated with any process, serving a softirq, tasklet or bh; | 98 | not associated with any process, serving a softirq or tasklet; |
100 | </para> | 99 | </para> |
101 | </listitem> | 100 | </listitem> |
102 | 101 | ||
103 | <listitem> | 102 | <listitem> |
104 | <para> | 103 | <para> |
105 | running in kernel space, associated with a process; | 104 | running in kernel space, associated with a process (user context); |
106 | </para> | 105 | </para> |
107 | </listitem> | 106 | </listitem> |
108 | 107 | ||
@@ -114,11 +113,12 @@ | |||
114 | </itemizedlist> | 113 | </itemizedlist> |
115 | 114 | ||
116 | <para> | 115 | <para> |
117 | There is a strict ordering between these: other than the last | 116 | There is an ordering between these. The bottom two can preempt |
118 | category (userspace) each can only be pre-empted by those above. | 117 | each other, but above that is a strict hierarchy: each can only be |
119 | For example, while a softirq is running on a CPU, no other | 118 | preempted by the ones above it. For example, while a softirq is |
120 | softirq will pre-empt it, but a hardware interrupt can. However, | 119 | running on a CPU, no other softirq will preempt it, but a hardware |
121 | any other CPUs in the system execute independently. | 120 | interrupt can. However, any other CPUs in the system execute |
121 | independently. | ||
122 | </para> | 122 | </para> |
123 | 123 | ||
124 | <para> | 124 | <para> |
@@ -130,10 +130,10 @@ | |||
130 | <title>User Context</title> | 130 | <title>User Context</title> |
131 | 131 | ||
132 | <para> | 132 | <para> |
133 | User context is when you are coming in from a system call or | 133 | User context is when you are coming in from a system call or other |
134 | other trap: you can sleep, and you own the CPU (except for | 134 | trap: like userspace, you can be preempted by more important tasks |
135 | interrupts) until you call <function>schedule()</function>. | 135 | and by interrupts. You can sleep, by calling |
136 | In other words, user context (unlike userspace) is not pre-emptable. | 136 | <function>schedule()</function>. |
137 | </para> | 137 | </para> |
138 | 138 | ||
139 | <note> | 139 | <note> |
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ | |||
153 | 153 | ||
154 | <caution> | 154 | <caution> |
155 | <para> | 155 | <para> |
156 | Beware that if you have interrupts or bottom halves disabled | 156 | Beware that if you have preemption or softirqs disabled |
157 | (see below), <function>in_interrupt()</function> will return a | 157 | (see below), <function>in_interrupt()</function> will return a |
158 | false positive. | 158 | false positive. |
159 | </para> | 159 | </para> |
@@ -168,10 +168,10 @@ | |||
168 | <hardware>keyboard</hardware> are examples of real | 168 | <hardware>keyboard</hardware> are examples of real |
169 | hardware which produce interrupts at any time. The kernel runs | 169 | hardware which produce interrupts at any time. The kernel runs |
170 | interrupt handlers, which services the hardware. The kernel | 170 | interrupt handlers, which services the hardware. The kernel |
171 | guarantees that this handler is never re-entered: if another | 171 | guarantees that this handler is never re-entered: if the same |
172 | interrupt arrives, it is queued (or dropped). Because it | 172 | interrupt arrives, it is queued (or dropped). Because it |
173 | disables interrupts, this handler has to be fast: frequently it | 173 | disables interrupts, this handler has to be fast: frequently it |
174 | simply acknowledges the interrupt, marks a `software interrupt' | 174 | simply acknowledges the interrupt, marks a 'software interrupt' |
175 | for execution and exits. | 175 | for execution and exits. |
176 | </para> | 176 | </para> |
177 | 177 | ||
@@ -188,60 +188,52 @@ | |||
188 | </sect1> | 188 | </sect1> |
189 | 189 | ||
190 | <sect1 id="basics-softirqs"> | 190 | <sect1 id="basics-softirqs"> |
191 | <title>Software Interrupt Context: Bottom Halves, Tasklets, softirqs</title> | 191 | <title>Software Interrupt Context: Softirqs and Tasklets</title> |
192 | 192 | ||
193 | <para> | 193 | <para> |
194 | Whenever a system call is about to return to userspace, or a | 194 | Whenever a system call is about to return to userspace, or a |
195 | hardware interrupt handler exits, any `software interrupts' | 195 | hardware interrupt handler exits, any 'software interrupts' |
196 | which are marked pending (usually by hardware interrupts) are | 196 | which are marked pending (usually by hardware interrupts) are |
197 | run (<filename>kernel/softirq.c</filename>). | 197 | run (<filename>kernel/softirq.c</filename>). |
198 | </para> | 198 | </para> |
199 | 199 | ||
200 | <para> | 200 | <para> |
201 | Much of the real interrupt handling work is done here. Early in | 201 | Much of the real interrupt handling work is done here. Early in |
202 | the transition to <acronym>SMP</acronym>, there were only `bottom | 202 | the transition to <acronym>SMP</acronym>, there were only 'bottom |
203 | halves' (BHs), which didn't take advantage of multiple CPUs. Shortly | 203 | halves' (BHs), which didn't take advantage of multiple CPUs. Shortly |
204 | after we switched from wind-up computers made of match-sticks and snot, | 204 | after we switched from wind-up computers made of match-sticks and snot, |
205 | we abandoned this limitation. | 205 | we abandoned this limitation and switched to 'softirqs'. |
206 | </para> | 206 | </para> |
207 | 207 | ||
208 | <para> | 208 | <para> |
209 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/interrupt.h</filename> lists the | 209 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/interrupt.h</filename> lists the |
210 | different BH's. No matter how many CPUs you have, no two BHs will run at | 210 | different softirqs. A very important softirq is the |
211 | the same time. This made the transition to SMP simpler, but sucks hard for | 211 | timer softirq (<filename |
212 | scalable performance. A very important bottom half is the timer | 212 | class="headerfile">include/linux/timer.h</filename>): you can |
213 | BH (<filename class="headerfile">include/linux/timer.h</filename>): you | 213 | register to have it call functions for you in a given length of |
214 | can register to have it call functions for you in a given length of time. | 214 | time. |
215 | </para> | 215 | </para> |
216 | 216 | ||
217 | <para> | 217 | <para> |
218 | 2.3.43 introduced softirqs, and re-implemented the (now | 218 | Softirqs are often a pain to deal with, since the same softirq |
219 | deprecated) BHs underneath them. Softirqs are fully-SMP | 219 | will run simultaneously on more than one CPU. For this reason, |
220 | versions of BHs: they can run on as many CPUs at once as | 220 | tasklets (<filename |
221 | required. This means they need to deal with any races in shared | 221 | class="headerfile">include/linux/interrupt.h</filename>) are more |
222 | data using their own locks. A bitmask is used to keep track of | 222 | often used: they are dynamically-registrable (meaning you can have |
223 | which are enabled, so the 32 available softirqs should not be | 223 | as many as you want), and they also guarantee that any tasklet |
224 | used up lightly. (<emphasis>Yes</emphasis>, people will | 224 | will only run on one CPU at any time, although different tasklets |
225 | notice). | 225 | can run simultaneously. |
226 | </para> | ||
227 | |||
228 | <para> | ||
229 | tasklets (<filename class="headerfile">include/linux/interrupt.h</filename>) | ||
230 | are like softirqs, except they are dynamically-registrable (meaning you | ||
231 | can have as many as you want), and they also guarantee that any tasklet | ||
232 | will only run on one CPU at any time, although different tasklets can | ||
233 | run simultaneously (unlike different BHs). | ||
234 | </para> | 226 | </para> |
235 | <caution> | 227 | <caution> |
236 | <para> | 228 | <para> |
237 | The name `tasklet' is misleading: they have nothing to do with `tasks', | 229 | The name 'tasklet' is misleading: they have nothing to do with 'tasks', |
238 | and probably more to do with some bad vodka Alexey Kuznetsov had at the | 230 | and probably more to do with some bad vodka Alexey Kuznetsov had at the |
239 | time. | 231 | time. |
240 | </para> | 232 | </para> |
241 | </caution> | 233 | </caution> |
242 | 234 | ||
243 | <para> | 235 | <para> |
244 | You can tell you are in a softirq (or bottom half, or tasklet) | 236 | You can tell you are in a softirq (or tasklet) |
245 | using the <function>in_softirq()</function> macro | 237 | using the <function>in_softirq()</function> macro |
246 | (<filename class="headerfile">include/linux/interrupt.h</filename>). | 238 | (<filename class="headerfile">include/linux/interrupt.h</filename>). |
247 | </para> | 239 | </para> |
@@ -288,11 +280,10 @@ | |||
288 | <term>A rigid stack limit</term> | 280 | <term>A rigid stack limit</term> |
289 | <listitem> | 281 | <listitem> |
290 | <para> | 282 | <para> |
291 | The kernel stack is about 6K in 2.2 (for most | 283 | Depending on configuration options the kernel stack is about 3K to 6K for most 32-bit architectures: it's |
292 | architectures: it's about 14K on the Alpha), and shared | 284 | about 14K on most 64-bit archs, and often shared with interrupts |
293 | with interrupts so you can't use it all. Avoid deep | 285 | so you can't use it all. Avoid deep recursion and huge local |
294 | recursion and huge local arrays on the stack (allocate | 286 | arrays on the stack (allocate them dynamically instead). |
295 | them dynamically instead). | ||
296 | </para> | 287 | </para> |
297 | </listitem> | 288 | </listitem> |
298 | </varlistentry> | 289 | </varlistentry> |
@@ -339,7 +330,7 @@ asmlinkage long sys_mycall(int arg) | |||
339 | 330 | ||
340 | <para> | 331 | <para> |
341 | If all your routine does is read or write some parameter, consider | 332 | If all your routine does is read or write some parameter, consider |
342 | implementing a <function>sysctl</function> interface instead. | 333 | implementing a <function>sysfs</function> interface instead. |
343 | </para> | 334 | </para> |
344 | 335 | ||
345 | <para> | 336 | <para> |
@@ -417,7 +408,10 @@ cond_resched(); /* Will sleep */ | |||
417 | </para> | 408 | </para> |
418 | 409 | ||
419 | <para> | 410 | <para> |
420 | You will eventually lock up your box if you break these rules. | 411 | You should always compile your kernel |
412 | <symbol>CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK_SLEEP</symbol> on, and it will warn | ||
413 | you if you break these rules. If you <emphasis>do</emphasis> break | ||
414 | the rules, you will eventually lock up your box. | ||
421 | </para> | 415 | </para> |
422 | 416 | ||
423 | <para> | 417 | <para> |
@@ -515,8 +509,7 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
515 | success). | 509 | success). |
516 | </para> | 510 | </para> |
517 | </caution> | 511 | </caution> |
518 | [Yes, this moronic interface makes me cringe. Please submit a | 512 | [Yes, this moronic interface makes me cringe. The flamewar comes up every year or so. --RR.] |
519 | patch and become my hero --RR.] | ||
520 | </para> | 513 | </para> |
521 | <para> | 514 | <para> |
522 | The functions may sleep implicitly. This should never be called | 515 | The functions may sleep implicitly. This should never be called |
@@ -587,10 +580,11 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
587 | </variablelist> | 580 | </variablelist> |
588 | 581 | ||
589 | <para> | 582 | <para> |
590 | If you see a <errorname>kmem_grow: Called nonatomically from int | 583 | If you see a <errorname>sleeping function called from invalid |
591 | </errorname> warning message you called a memory allocation function | 584 | context</errorname> warning message, then maybe you called a |
592 | from interrupt context without <constant>GFP_ATOMIC</constant>. | 585 | sleeping allocation function from interrupt context without |
593 | You should really fix that. Run, don't walk. | 586 | <constant>GFP_ATOMIC</constant>. You should really fix that. |
587 | Run, don't walk. | ||
594 | </para> | 588 | </para> |
595 | 589 | ||
596 | <para> | 590 | <para> |
@@ -639,16 +633,16 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
639 | </sect1> | 633 | </sect1> |
640 | 634 | ||
641 | <sect1 id="routines-udelay"> | 635 | <sect1 id="routines-udelay"> |
642 | <title><function>udelay()</function>/<function>mdelay()</function> | 636 | <title><function>mdelay()</function>/<function>udelay()</function> |
643 | <filename class="headerfile">include/asm/delay.h</filename> | 637 | <filename class="headerfile">include/asm/delay.h</filename> |
644 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/delay.h</filename> | 638 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/delay.h</filename> |
645 | </title> | 639 | </title> |
646 | 640 | ||
647 | <para> | 641 | <para> |
648 | The <function>udelay()</function> function can be used for small pauses. | 642 | The <function>udelay()</function> and <function>ndelay()</function> functions can be used for small pauses. |
649 | Do not use large values with <function>udelay()</function> as you risk | 643 | Do not use large values with them as you risk |
650 | overflow - the helper function <function>mdelay()</function> is useful | 644 | overflow - the helper function <function>mdelay()</function> is useful |
651 | here, or even consider <function>schedule_timeout()</function>. | 645 | here, or consider <function>msleep()</function>. |
652 | </para> | 646 | </para> |
653 | </sect1> | 647 | </sect1> |
654 | 648 | ||
@@ -698,8 +692,8 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
698 | These routines disable soft interrupts on the local CPU, and | 692 | These routines disable soft interrupts on the local CPU, and |
699 | restore them. They are reentrant; if soft interrupts were | 693 | restore them. They are reentrant; if soft interrupts were |
700 | disabled before, they will still be disabled after this pair | 694 | disabled before, they will still be disabled after this pair |
701 | of functions has been called. They prevent softirqs, tasklets | 695 | of functions has been called. They prevent softirqs and tasklets |
702 | and bottom halves from running on the current CPU. | 696 | from running on the current CPU. |
703 | </para> | 697 | </para> |
704 | </sect1> | 698 | </sect1> |
705 | 699 | ||
@@ -708,10 +702,16 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
708 | <filename class="headerfile">include/asm/smp.h</filename></title> | 702 | <filename class="headerfile">include/asm/smp.h</filename></title> |
709 | 703 | ||
710 | <para> | 704 | <para> |
711 | <function>smp_processor_id()</function> returns the current | 705 | <function>get_cpu()</function> disables preemption (so you won't |
712 | processor number, between 0 and <symbol>NR_CPUS</symbol> (the | 706 | suddenly get moved to another CPU) and returns the current |
713 | maximum number of CPUs supported by Linux, currently 32). These | 707 | processor number, between 0 and <symbol>NR_CPUS</symbol>. Note |
714 | values are not necessarily continuous. | 708 | that the CPU numbers are not necessarily continuous. You return |
709 | it again with <function>put_cpu()</function> when you are done. | ||
710 | </para> | ||
711 | <para> | ||
712 | If you know you cannot be preempted by another task (ie. you are | ||
713 | in interrupt context, or have preemption disabled) you can use | ||
714 | smp_processor_id(). | ||
715 | </para> | 715 | </para> |
716 | </sect1> | 716 | </sect1> |
717 | 717 | ||
@@ -722,19 +722,14 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
722 | <para> | 722 | <para> |
723 | After boot, the kernel frees up a special section; functions | 723 | After boot, the kernel frees up a special section; functions |
724 | marked with <type>__init</type> and data structures marked with | 724 | marked with <type>__init</type> and data structures marked with |
725 | <type>__initdata</type> are dropped after boot is complete (within | 725 | <type>__initdata</type> are dropped after boot is complete: similarly |
726 | modules this directive is currently ignored). <type>__exit</type> | 726 | modules discard this memory after initialization. <type>__exit</type> |
727 | is used to declare a function which is only required on exit: the | 727 | is used to declare a function which is only required on exit: the |
728 | function will be dropped if this file is not compiled as a module. | 728 | function will be dropped if this file is not compiled as a module. |
729 | See the header file for use. Note that it makes no sense for a function | 729 | See the header file for use. Note that it makes no sense for a function |
730 | marked with <type>__init</type> to be exported to modules with | 730 | marked with <type>__init</type> to be exported to modules with |
731 | <function>EXPORT_SYMBOL()</function> - this will break. | 731 | <function>EXPORT_SYMBOL()</function> - this will break. |
732 | </para> | 732 | </para> |
733 | <para> | ||
734 | Static data structures marked as <type>__initdata</type> must be initialised | ||
735 | (as opposed to ordinary static data which is zeroed BSS) and cannot be | ||
736 | <type>const</type>. | ||
737 | </para> | ||
738 | 733 | ||
739 | </sect1> | 734 | </sect1> |
740 | 735 | ||
@@ -762,9 +757,8 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
762 | <para> | 757 | <para> |
763 | The function can return a negative error number to cause | 758 | The function can return a negative error number to cause |
764 | module loading to fail (unfortunately, this has no effect if | 759 | module loading to fail (unfortunately, this has no effect if |
765 | the module is compiled into the kernel). For modules, this is | 760 | the module is compiled into the kernel). This function is |
766 | called in user context, with interrupts enabled, and the | 761 | called in user context with interrupts enabled, so it can sleep. |
767 | kernel lock held, so it can sleep. | ||
768 | </para> | 762 | </para> |
769 | </sect1> | 763 | </sect1> |
770 | 764 | ||
@@ -779,6 +773,34 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
779 | reached zero. This function can also sleep, but cannot fail: | 773 | reached zero. This function can also sleep, but cannot fail: |
780 | everything must be cleaned up by the time it returns. | 774 | everything must be cleaned up by the time it returns. |
781 | </para> | 775 | </para> |
776 | |||
777 | <para> | ||
778 | Note that this macro is optional: if it is not present, your | ||
779 | module will not be removable (except for 'rmmod -f'). | ||
780 | </para> | ||
781 | </sect1> | ||
782 | |||
783 | <sect1 id="routines-module-use-counters"> | ||
784 | <title> <function>try_module_get()</function>/<function>module_put()</function> | ||
785 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/module.h</filename></title> | ||
786 | |||
787 | <para> | ||
788 | These manipulate the module usage count, to protect against | ||
789 | removal (a module also can't be removed if another module uses one | ||
790 | of its exported symbols: see below). Before calling into module | ||
791 | code, you should call <function>try_module_get()</function> on | ||
792 | that module: if it fails, then the module is being removed and you | ||
793 | should act as if it wasn't there. Otherwise, you can safely enter | ||
794 | the module, and call <function>module_put()</function> when you're | ||
795 | finished. | ||
796 | </para> | ||
797 | |||
798 | <para> | ||
799 | Most registerable structures have an | ||
800 | <structfield>owner</structfield> field, such as in the | ||
801 | <structname>file_operations</structname> structure. Set this field | ||
802 | to the macro <symbol>THIS_MODULE</symbol>. | ||
803 | </para> | ||
782 | </sect1> | 804 | </sect1> |
783 | 805 | ||
784 | <!-- add info on new-style module refcounting here --> | 806 | <!-- add info on new-style module refcounting here --> |
@@ -821,7 +843,7 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
821 | There is a macro to do this: | 843 | There is a macro to do this: |
822 | <function>wait_event_interruptible()</function> | 844 | <function>wait_event_interruptible()</function> |
823 | 845 | ||
824 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/sched.h</filename> The | 846 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/wait.h</filename> The |
825 | first argument is the wait queue head, and the second is an | 847 | first argument is the wait queue head, and the second is an |
826 | expression which is evaluated; the macro returns | 848 | expression which is evaluated; the macro returns |
827 | <returnvalue>0</returnvalue> when this expression is true, or | 849 | <returnvalue>0</returnvalue> when this expression is true, or |
@@ -847,10 +869,11 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
847 | <para> | 869 | <para> |
848 | Call <function>wake_up()</function> | 870 | Call <function>wake_up()</function> |
849 | 871 | ||
850 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/sched.h</filename>;, | 872 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/wait.h</filename>;, |
851 | which will wake up every process in the queue. The exception is | 873 | which will wake up every process in the queue. The exception is |
852 | if one has <constant>TASK_EXCLUSIVE</constant> set, in which case | 874 | if one has <constant>TASK_EXCLUSIVE</constant> set, in which case |
853 | the remainder of the queue will not be woken. | 875 | the remainder of the queue will not be woken. There are other variants |
876 | of this basic function available in the same header. | ||
854 | </para> | 877 | </para> |
855 | </sect1> | 878 | </sect1> |
856 | </chapter> | 879 | </chapter> |
@@ -863,7 +886,7 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
863 | first class of operations work on <type>atomic_t</type> | 886 | first class of operations work on <type>atomic_t</type> |
864 | 887 | ||
865 | <filename class="headerfile">include/asm/atomic.h</filename>; this | 888 | <filename class="headerfile">include/asm/atomic.h</filename>; this |
866 | contains a signed integer (at least 24 bits long), and you must use | 889 | contains a signed integer (at least 32 bits long), and you must use |
867 | these functions to manipulate or read atomic_t variables. | 890 | these functions to manipulate or read atomic_t variables. |
868 | <function>atomic_read()</function> and | 891 | <function>atomic_read()</function> and |
869 | <function>atomic_set()</function> get and set the counter, | 892 | <function>atomic_set()</function> get and set the counter, |
@@ -882,13 +905,12 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
882 | 905 | ||
883 | <para> | 906 | <para> |
884 | Note that these functions are slower than normal arithmetic, and | 907 | Note that these functions are slower than normal arithmetic, and |
885 | so should not be used unnecessarily. On some platforms they | 908 | so should not be used unnecessarily. |
886 | are much slower, like 32-bit Sparc where they use a spinlock. | ||
887 | </para> | 909 | </para> |
888 | 910 | ||
889 | <para> | 911 | <para> |
890 | The second class of atomic operations is atomic bit operations on a | 912 | The second class of atomic operations is atomic bit operations on an |
891 | <type>long</type>, defined in | 913 | <type>unsigned long</type>, defined in |
892 | 914 | ||
893 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/bitops.h</filename>. These | 915 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/bitops.h</filename>. These |
894 | operations generally take a pointer to the bit pattern, and a bit | 916 | operations generally take a pointer to the bit pattern, and a bit |
@@ -899,7 +921,7 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
899 | <function>test_and_clear_bit()</function> and | 921 | <function>test_and_clear_bit()</function> and |
900 | <function>test_and_change_bit()</function> do the same thing, | 922 | <function>test_and_change_bit()</function> do the same thing, |
901 | except return true if the bit was previously set; these are | 923 | except return true if the bit was previously set; these are |
902 | particularly useful for very simple locking. | 924 | particularly useful for atomically setting flags. |
903 | </para> | 925 | </para> |
904 | 926 | ||
905 | <para> | 927 | <para> |
@@ -907,12 +929,6 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
907 | than BITS_PER_LONG. The resulting behavior is strange on big-endian | 929 | than BITS_PER_LONG. The resulting behavior is strange on big-endian |
908 | platforms though so it is a good idea not to do this. | 930 | platforms though so it is a good idea not to do this. |
909 | </para> | 931 | </para> |
910 | |||
911 | <para> | ||
912 | Note that the order of bits depends on the architecture, and in | ||
913 | particular, the bitfield passed to these operations must be at | ||
914 | least as large as a <type>long</type>. | ||
915 | </para> | ||
916 | </chapter> | 932 | </chapter> |
917 | 933 | ||
918 | <chapter id="symbols"> | 934 | <chapter id="symbols"> |
@@ -932,11 +948,8 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
932 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/module.h</filename></title> | 948 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/module.h</filename></title> |
933 | 949 | ||
934 | <para> | 950 | <para> |
935 | This is the classic method of exporting a symbol, and it works | 951 | This is the classic method of exporting a symbol: dynamically |
936 | for both modules and non-modules. In the kernel all these | 952 | loaded modules will be able to use the symbol as normal. |
937 | declarations are often bundled into a single file to help | ||
938 | genksyms (which searches source files for these declarations). | ||
939 | See the comment on genksyms and Makefiles below. | ||
940 | </para> | 953 | </para> |
941 | </sect1> | 954 | </sect1> |
942 | 955 | ||
@@ -949,7 +962,8 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
949 | symbols exported by <function>EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL()</function> can | 962 | symbols exported by <function>EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL()</function> can |
950 | only be seen by modules with a | 963 | only be seen by modules with a |
951 | <function>MODULE_LICENSE()</function> that specifies a GPL | 964 | <function>MODULE_LICENSE()</function> that specifies a GPL |
952 | compatible license. | 965 | compatible license. It implies that the function is considered |
966 | an internal implementation issue, and not really an interface. | ||
953 | </para> | 967 | </para> |
954 | </sect1> | 968 | </sect1> |
955 | </chapter> | 969 | </chapter> |
@@ -962,12 +976,13 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
962 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/list.h</filename></title> | 976 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/list.h</filename></title> |
963 | 977 | ||
964 | <para> | 978 | <para> |
965 | There are three sets of linked-list routines in the kernel | 979 | There used to be three sets of linked-list routines in the kernel |
966 | headers, but this one seems to be winning out (and Linus has | 980 | headers, but this one is the winner. If you don't have some |
967 | used it). If you don't have some particular pressing need for | 981 | particular pressing need for a single list, it's a good choice. |
968 | a single list, it's a good choice. In fact, I don't care | 982 | </para> |
969 | whether it's a good choice or not, just use it so we can get | 983 | |
970 | rid of the others. | 984 | <para> |
985 | In particular, <function>list_for_each_entry</function> is useful. | ||
971 | </para> | 986 | </para> |
972 | </sect1> | 987 | </sect1> |
973 | 988 | ||
@@ -979,14 +994,13 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); | |||
979 | convention, and return <returnvalue>0</returnvalue> for success, | 994 | convention, and return <returnvalue>0</returnvalue> for success, |
980 | and a negative error number | 995 | and a negative error number |
981 | (eg. <returnvalue>-EFAULT</returnvalue>) for failure. This can be | 996 | (eg. <returnvalue>-EFAULT</returnvalue>) for failure. This can be |
982 | unintuitive at first, but it's fairly widespread in the networking | 997 | unintuitive at first, but it's fairly widespread in the kernel. |
983 | code, for example. | ||
984 | </para> | 998 | </para> |
985 | 999 | ||
986 | <para> | 1000 | <para> |
987 | The filesystem code uses <function>ERR_PTR()</function> | 1001 | Using <function>ERR_PTR()</function> |
988 | 1002 | ||
989 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/fs.h</filename>; to | 1003 | <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/err.h</filename>; to |
990 | encode a negative error number into a pointer, and | 1004 | encode a negative error number into a pointer, and |
991 | <function>IS_ERR()</function> and <function>PTR_ERR()</function> | 1005 | <function>IS_ERR()</function> and <function>PTR_ERR()</function> |
992 | to get it back out again: avoids a separate pointer parameter for | 1006 | to get it back out again: avoids a separate pointer parameter for |
@@ -1040,7 +1054,7 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = { | |||
1040 | supported, due to lack of general use, but the following are | 1054 | supported, due to lack of general use, but the following are |
1041 | considered standard (see the GCC info page section "C | 1055 | considered standard (see the GCC info page section "C |
1042 | Extensions" for more details - Yes, really the info page, the | 1056 | Extensions" for more details - Yes, really the info page, the |
1043 | man page is only a short summary of the stuff in info): | 1057 | man page is only a short summary of the stuff in info). |
1044 | </para> | 1058 | </para> |
1045 | <itemizedlist> | 1059 | <itemizedlist> |
1046 | <listitem> | 1060 | <listitem> |
@@ -1091,7 +1105,7 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = { | |||
1091 | </listitem> | 1105 | </listitem> |
1092 | <listitem> | 1106 | <listitem> |
1093 | <para> | 1107 | <para> |
1094 | Function names as strings (__FUNCTION__) | 1108 | Function names as strings (__func__). |
1095 | </para> | 1109 | </para> |
1096 | </listitem> | 1110 | </listitem> |
1097 | <listitem> | 1111 | <listitem> |
@@ -1164,63 +1178,35 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = { | |||
1164 | <listitem> | 1178 | <listitem> |
1165 | <para> | 1179 | <para> |
1166 | Usually you want a configuration option for your kernel hack. | 1180 | Usually you want a configuration option for your kernel hack. |
1167 | Edit <filename>Config.in</filename> in the appropriate directory | 1181 | Edit <filename>Kconfig</filename> in the appropriate directory. |
1168 | (but under <filename>arch/</filename> it's called | 1182 | The Config language is simple to use by cut and paste, and there's |
1169 | <filename>config.in</filename>). The Config Language used is not | 1183 | complete documentation in |
1170 | bash, even though it looks like bash; the safe way is to use only | 1184 | <filename>Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt</filename>. |
1171 | the constructs that you already see in | ||
1172 | <filename>Config.in</filename> files (see | ||
1173 | <filename>Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt</filename>). | ||
1174 | It's good to run "make xconfig" at least once to test (because | ||
1175 | it's the only one with a static parser). | ||
1176 | </para> | ||
1177 | |||
1178 | <para> | ||
1179 | Variables which can be Y or N use <type>bool</type> followed by a | ||
1180 | tagline and the config define name (which must start with | ||
1181 | CONFIG_). The <type>tristate</type> function is the same, but | ||
1182 | allows the answer M (which defines | ||
1183 | <symbol>CONFIG_foo_MODULE</symbol> in your source, instead of | ||
1184 | <symbol>CONFIG_FOO</symbol>) if <symbol>CONFIG_MODULES</symbol> | ||
1185 | is enabled. | ||
1186 | </para> | 1185 | </para> |
1187 | 1186 | ||
1188 | <para> | 1187 | <para> |
1189 | You may well want to make your CONFIG option only visible if | 1188 | You may well want to make your CONFIG option only visible if |
1190 | <symbol>CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL</symbol> is enabled: this serves as a | 1189 | <symbol>CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL</symbol> is enabled: this serves as a |
1191 | warning to users. There many other fancy things you can do: see | 1190 | warning to users. There many other fancy things you can do: see |
1192 | the various <filename>Config.in</filename> files for ideas. | 1191 | the various <filename>Kconfig</filename> files for ideas. |
1193 | </para> | 1192 | </para> |
1194 | </listitem> | ||
1195 | 1193 | ||
1196 | <listitem> | ||
1197 | <para> | 1194 | <para> |
1198 | Edit the <filename>Makefile</filename>: the CONFIG variables are | 1195 | In your description of the option, make sure you address both the |
1199 | exported here so you can conditionalize compilation with `ifeq'. | 1196 | expert user and the user who knows nothing about your feature. Mention |
1200 | If your file exports symbols then add the names to | 1197 | incompatibilities and issues here. <emphasis> Definitely |
1201 | <varname>export-objs</varname> so that genksyms will find them. | 1198 | </emphasis> end your description with <quote> if in doubt, say N |
1202 | <caution> | 1199 | </quote> (or, occasionally, `Y'); this is for people who have no |
1203 | <para> | 1200 | idea what you are talking about. |
1204 | There is a restriction on the kernel build system that objects | ||
1205 | which export symbols must have globally unique names. | ||
1206 | If your object does not have a globally unique name then the | ||
1207 | standard fix is to move the | ||
1208 | <function>EXPORT_SYMBOL()</function> statements to their own | ||
1209 | object with a unique name. | ||
1210 | This is why several systems have separate exporting objects, | ||
1211 | usually suffixed with ksyms. | ||
1212 | </para> | ||
1213 | </caution> | ||
1214 | </para> | 1201 | </para> |
1215 | </listitem> | 1202 | </listitem> |
1216 | 1203 | ||
1217 | <listitem> | 1204 | <listitem> |
1218 | <para> | 1205 | <para> |
1219 | Document your option in Documentation/Configure.help. Mention | 1206 | Edit the <filename>Makefile</filename>: the CONFIG variables are |
1220 | incompatibilities and issues here. <emphasis> Definitely | 1207 | exported here so you can usually just add a "obj-$(CONFIG_xxx) += |
1221 | </emphasis> end your description with <quote> if in doubt, say N | 1208 | xxx.o" line. The syntax is documented in |
1222 | </quote> (or, occasionally, `Y'); this is for people who have no | 1209 | <filename>Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt</filename>. |
1223 | idea what you are talking about. | ||
1224 | </para> | 1210 | </para> |
1225 | </listitem> | 1211 | </listitem> |
1226 | 1212 | ||
@@ -1253,20 +1239,12 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = { | |||
1253 | </para> | 1239 | </para> |
1254 | 1240 | ||
1255 | <para> | 1241 | <para> |
1256 | <filename>include/linux/brlock.h:</filename> | 1242 | <filename>include/asm-i386/delay.h:</filename> |
1257 | </para> | 1243 | </para> |
1258 | <programlisting> | 1244 | <programlisting> |
1259 | extern inline void br_read_lock (enum brlock_indices idx) | 1245 | #define ndelay(n) (__builtin_constant_p(n) ? \ |
1260 | { | 1246 | ((n) > 20000 ? __bad_ndelay() : __const_udelay((n) * 5ul)) : \ |
1261 | /* | 1247 | __ndelay(n)) |
1262 | * This causes a link-time bug message if an | ||
1263 | * invalid index is used: | ||
1264 | */ | ||
1265 | if (idx >= __BR_END) | ||
1266 | __br_lock_usage_bug(); | ||
1267 | |||
1268 | read_lock(&__brlock_array[smp_processor_id()][idx]); | ||
1269 | } | ||
1270 | </programlisting> | 1248 | </programlisting> |
1271 | 1249 | ||
1272 | <para> | 1250 | <para> |
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl index 4367f4642f3d..42a760cd7467 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl | |||
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ | |||
96 | 96 | ||
97 | <chapter id="pubfunctions"> | 97 | <chapter id="pubfunctions"> |
98 | <title>Public Functions Provided</title> | 98 | <title>Public Functions Provided</title> |
99 | !Earch/i386/kernel/mca.c | 99 | !Edrivers/mca/mca-legacy.c |
100 | </chapter> | 100 | </chapter> |
101 | 101 | ||
102 | <chapter id="dmafunctions"> | 102 | <chapter id="dmafunctions"> |
diff --git a/Documentation/IPMI.txt b/Documentation/IPMI.txt index 84d3d4d10c17..bf1cf98d2a27 100644 --- a/Documentation/IPMI.txt +++ b/Documentation/IPMI.txt | |||
@@ -605,12 +605,13 @@ is in the ipmi_poweroff module. When the system requests a powerdown, | |||
605 | it will send the proper IPMI commands to do this. This is supported on | 605 | it will send the proper IPMI commands to do this. This is supported on |
606 | several platforms. | 606 | several platforms. |
607 | 607 | ||
608 | There is a module parameter named "poweroff_control" that may either be zero | 608 | There is a module parameter named "poweroff_powercycle" that may |
609 | (do a power down) or 2 (do a power cycle, power the system off, then power | 609 | either be zero (do a power down) or non-zero (do a power cycle, power |
610 | it on in a few seconds). Setting ipmi_poweroff.poweroff_control=x will do | 610 | the system off, then power it on in a few seconds). Setting |
611 | the same thing on the kernel command line. The parameter is also available | 611 | ipmi_poweroff.poweroff_control=x will do the same thing on the kernel |
612 | via the proc filesystem in /proc/ipmi/poweroff_control. Note that if the | 612 | command line. The parameter is also available via the proc filesystem |
613 | system does not support power cycling, it will always to the power off. | 613 | in /proc/sys/dev/ipmi/poweroff_powercycle. Note that if the system |
614 | does not support power cycling, it will always do the power off. | ||
614 | 615 | ||
615 | Note that if you have ACPI enabled, the system will prefer using ACPI to | 616 | Note that if you have ACPI enabled, the system will prefer using ACPI to |
616 | power off. | 617 | power off. |
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d0634a5c3445 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ | |||
1 | Using RCU to Protect Dynamic NMI Handlers | ||
2 | |||
3 | |||
4 | Although RCU is usually used to protect read-mostly data structures, | ||
5 | it is possible to use RCU to provide dynamic non-maskable interrupt | ||
6 | handlers, as well as dynamic irq handlers. This document describes | ||
7 | how to do this, drawing loosely from Zwane Mwaikambo's NMI-timer | ||
8 | work in "arch/i386/oprofile/nmi_timer_int.c" and in | ||
9 | "arch/i386/kernel/traps.c". | ||
10 | |||
11 | The relevant pieces of code are listed below, each followed by a | ||
12 | brief explanation. | ||
13 | |||
14 | static int dummy_nmi_callback(struct pt_regs *regs, int cpu) | ||
15 | { | ||
16 | return 0; | ||
17 | } | ||
18 | |||
19 | The dummy_nmi_callback() function is a "dummy" NMI handler that does | ||
20 | nothing, but returns zero, thus saying that it did nothing, allowing | ||
21 | the NMI handler to take the default machine-specific action. | ||
22 | |||
23 | static nmi_callback_t nmi_callback = dummy_nmi_callback; | ||
24 | |||
25 | This nmi_callback variable is a global function pointer to the current | ||
26 | NMI handler. | ||
27 | |||
28 | fastcall void do_nmi(struct pt_regs * regs, long error_code) | ||
29 | { | ||
30 | int cpu; | ||
31 | |||
32 | nmi_enter(); | ||
33 | |||
34 | cpu = smp_processor_id(); | ||
35 | ++nmi_count(cpu); | ||
36 | |||
37 | if (!rcu_dereference(nmi_callback)(regs, cpu)) | ||
38 | default_do_nmi(regs); | ||
39 | |||
40 | nmi_exit(); | ||
41 | } | ||
42 | |||
43 | The do_nmi() function processes each NMI. It first disables preemption | ||
44 | in the same way that a hardware irq would, then increments the per-CPU | ||
45 | count of NMIs. It then invokes the NMI handler stored in the nmi_callback | ||
46 | function pointer. If this handler returns zero, do_nmi() invokes the | ||
47 | default_do_nmi() function to handle a machine-specific NMI. Finally, | ||
48 | preemption is restored. | ||
49 | |||
50 | Strictly speaking, rcu_dereference() is not needed, since this code runs | ||
51 | only on i386, which does not need rcu_dereference() anyway. However, | ||
52 | it is a good documentation aid, particularly for anyone attempting to | ||
53 | do something similar on Alpha. | ||
54 | |||
55 | Quick Quiz: Why might the rcu_dereference() be necessary on Alpha, | ||
56 | given that the code referenced by the pointer is read-only? | ||
57 | |||
58 | |||
59 | Back to the discussion of NMI and RCU... | ||
60 | |||
61 | void set_nmi_callback(nmi_callback_t callback) | ||
62 | { | ||
63 | rcu_assign_pointer(nmi_callback, callback); | ||
64 | } | ||
65 | |||
66 | The set_nmi_callback() function registers an NMI handler. Note that any | ||
67 | data that is to be used by the callback must be initialized up -before- | ||
68 | the call to set_nmi_callback(). On architectures that do not order | ||
69 | writes, the rcu_assign_pointer() ensures that the NMI handler sees the | ||
70 | initialized values. | ||
71 | |||
72 | void unset_nmi_callback(void) | ||
73 | { | ||
74 | rcu_assign_pointer(nmi_callback, dummy_nmi_callback); | ||
75 | } | ||
76 | |||
77 | This function unregisters an NMI handler, restoring the original | ||
78 | dummy_nmi_handler(). However, there may well be an NMI handler | ||
79 | currently executing on some other CPU. We therefore cannot free | ||
80 | up any data structures used by the old NMI handler until execution | ||
81 | of it completes on all other CPUs. | ||
82 | |||
83 | One way to accomplish this is via synchronize_sched(), perhaps as | ||
84 | follows: | ||
85 | |||
86 | unset_nmi_callback(); | ||
87 | synchronize_sched(); | ||
88 | kfree(my_nmi_data); | ||
89 | |||
90 | This works because synchronize_sched() blocks until all CPUs complete | ||
91 | any preemption-disabled segments of code that they were executing. | ||
92 | Since NMI handlers disable preemption, synchronize_sched() is guaranteed | ||
93 | not to return until all ongoing NMI handlers exit. It is therefore safe | ||
94 | to free up the handler's data as soon as synchronize_sched() returns. | ||
95 | |||
96 | |||
97 | Answer to Quick Quiz | ||
98 | |||
99 | Why might the rcu_dereference() be necessary on Alpha, given | ||
100 | that the code referenced by the pointer is read-only? | ||
101 | |||
102 | Answer: The caller to set_nmi_callback() might well have | ||
103 | initialized some data that is to be used by the | ||
104 | new NMI handler. In this case, the rcu_dereference() | ||
105 | would be needed, because otherwise a CPU that received | ||
106 | an NMI just after the new handler was set might see | ||
107 | the pointer to the new NMI handler, but the old | ||
108 | pre-initialized version of the handler's data. | ||
109 | |||
110 | More important, the rcu_dereference() makes it clear | ||
111 | to someone reading the code that the pointer is being | ||
112 | protected by RCU. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a23fee66064d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ | |||
1 | Refcounter framework for elements of lists/arrays protected by | ||
2 | RCU. | ||
3 | |||
4 | Refcounting on elements of lists which are protected by traditional | ||
5 | reader/writer spinlocks or semaphores are straight forward as in: | ||
6 | |||
7 | 1. 2. | ||
8 | add() search_and_reference() | ||
9 | { { | ||
10 | alloc_object read_lock(&list_lock); | ||
11 | ... search_for_element | ||
12 | atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); atomic_inc(&el->rc); | ||
13 | write_lock(&list_lock); ... | ||
14 | add_element read_unlock(&list_lock); | ||
15 | ... ... | ||
16 | write_unlock(&list_lock); } | ||
17 | } | ||
18 | |||
19 | 3. 4. | ||
20 | release_referenced() delete() | ||
21 | { { | ||
22 | ... write_lock(&list_lock); | ||
23 | atomic_dec(&el->rc, relfunc) ... | ||
24 | ... delete_element | ||
25 | } write_unlock(&list_lock); | ||
26 | ... | ||
27 | if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc)) | ||
28 | kfree(el); | ||
29 | ... | ||
30 | } | ||
31 | |||
32 | If this list/array is made lock free using rcu as in changing the | ||
33 | write_lock in add() and delete() to spin_lock and changing read_lock | ||
34 | in search_and_reference to rcu_read_lock(), the rcuref_get in | ||
35 | search_and_reference could potentially hold reference to an element which | ||
36 | has already been deleted from the list/array. rcuref_lf_get_rcu takes | ||
37 | care of this scenario. search_and_reference should look as; | ||
38 | |||
39 | 1. 2. | ||
40 | add() search_and_reference() | ||
41 | { { | ||
42 | alloc_object rcu_read_lock(); | ||
43 | ... search_for_element | ||
44 | atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); if (rcuref_inc_lf(&el->rc)) { | ||
45 | write_lock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); | ||
46 | return FAIL; | ||
47 | add_element } | ||
48 | ... ... | ||
49 | write_unlock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); | ||
50 | } } | ||
51 | 3. 4. | ||
52 | release_referenced() delete() | ||
53 | { { | ||
54 | ... write_lock(&list_lock); | ||
55 | rcuref_dec(&el->rc, relfunc) ... | ||
56 | ... delete_element | ||
57 | } write_unlock(&list_lock); | ||
58 | ... | ||
59 | if (rcuref_dec_and_test(&el->rc)) | ||
60 | call_rcu(&el->head, el_free); | ||
61 | ... | ||
62 | } | ||
63 | |||
64 | Sometimes, reference to the element need to be obtained in the | ||
65 | update (write) stream. In such cases, rcuref_inc_lf might be an overkill | ||
66 | since the spinlock serialising list updates are held. rcuref_inc | ||
67 | is to be used in such cases. | ||
68 | For arches which do not have cmpxchg rcuref_inc_lf | ||
69 | api uses a hashed spinlock implementation and the same hashed spinlock | ||
70 | is acquired in all rcuref_xxx primitives to preserve atomicity. | ||
71 | Note: Use rcuref_inc api only if you need to use rcuref_inc_lf on the | ||
72 | refcounter atleast at one place. Mixing rcuref_inc and atomic_xxx api | ||
73 | might lead to races. rcuref_inc_lf() must be used in lockfree | ||
74 | RCU critical sections only. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi-hotkey.txt b/Documentation/acpi-hotkey.txt index 0acdc80c30c2..744f1aec6553 100644 --- a/Documentation/acpi-hotkey.txt +++ b/Documentation/acpi-hotkey.txt | |||
@@ -35,4 +35,4 @@ created. Please use command "cat /proc/acpi/hotkey/polling_method" | |||
35 | to retrieve it. | 35 | to retrieve it. |
36 | 36 | ||
37 | Note: Use cmdline "acpi_generic_hotkey" to over-ride | 37 | Note: Use cmdline "acpi_generic_hotkey" to over-ride |
38 | loading any platform specific drivers. | 38 | platform-specific with generic driver. |
diff --git a/Documentation/applying-patches.txt b/Documentation/applying-patches.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..681e426e2482 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/applying-patches.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,439 @@ | |||
1 | |||
2 | Applying Patches To The Linux Kernel | ||
3 | ------------------------------------ | ||
4 | |||
5 | (Written by Jesper Juhl, August 2005) | ||
6 | |||
7 | |||
8 | |||
9 | A frequently asked question on the Linux Kernel Mailing List is how to apply | ||
10 | a patch to the kernel or, more specifically, what base kernel a patch for | ||
11 | one of the many trees/branches should be applied to. Hopefully this document | ||
12 | will explain this to you. | ||
13 | |||
14 | In addition to explaining how to apply and revert patches, a brief | ||
15 | description of the different kernel trees (and examples of how to apply | ||
16 | their specific patches) is also provided. | ||
17 | |||
18 | |||
19 | What is a patch? | ||
20 | --- | ||
21 | A patch is a small text document containing a delta of changes between two | ||
22 | different versions of a source tree. Patches are created with the `diff' | ||
23 | program. | ||
24 | To correctly apply a patch you need to know what base it was generated from | ||
25 | and what new version the patch will change the source tree into. These | ||
26 | should both be present in the patch file metadata or be possible to deduce | ||
27 | from the filename. | ||
28 | |||
29 | |||
30 | How do I apply or revert a patch? | ||
31 | --- | ||
32 | You apply a patch with the `patch' program. The patch program reads a diff | ||
33 | (or patch) file and makes the changes to the source tree described in it. | ||
34 | |||
35 | Patches for the Linux kernel are generated relative to the parent directory | ||
36 | holding the kernel source dir. | ||
37 | |||
38 | This means that paths to files inside the patch file contain the name of the | ||
39 | kernel source directories it was generated against (or some other directory | ||
40 | names like "a/" and "b/"). | ||
41 | Since this is unlikely to match the name of the kernel source dir on your | ||
42 | local machine (but is often useful info to see what version an otherwise | ||
43 | unlabeled patch was generated against) you should change into your kernel | ||
44 | source directory and then strip the first element of the path from filenames | ||
45 | in the patch file when applying it (the -p1 argument to `patch' does this). | ||
46 | |||
47 | To revert a previously applied patch, use the -R argument to patch. | ||
48 | So, if you applied a patch like this: | ||
49 | patch -p1 < ../patch-x.y.z | ||
50 | |||
51 | You can revert (undo) it like this: | ||
52 | patch -R -p1 < ../patch-x.y.z | ||
53 | |||
54 | |||
55 | How do I feed a patch/diff file to `patch'? | ||
56 | --- | ||
57 | This (as usual with Linux and other UNIX like operating systems) can be | ||
58 | done in several different ways. | ||
59 | In all the examples below I feed the file (in uncompressed form) to patch | ||
60 | via stdin using the following syntax: | ||
61 | patch -p1 < path/to/patch-x.y.z | ||
62 | |||
63 | If you just want to be able to follow the examples below and don't want to | ||
64 | know of more than one way to use patch, then you can stop reading this | ||
65 | section here. | ||
66 | |||
67 | Patch can also get the name of the file to use via the -i argument, like | ||
68 | this: | ||
69 | patch -p1 -i path/to/patch-x.y.z | ||
70 | |||
71 | If your patch file is compressed with gzip or bzip2 and you don't want to | ||
72 | uncompress it before applying it, then you can feed it to patch like this | ||
73 | instead: | ||
74 | zcat path/to/patch-x.y.z.gz | patch -p1 | ||
75 | bzcat path/to/patch-x.y.z.bz2 | patch -p1 | ||
76 | |||
77 | If you wish to uncompress the patch file by hand first before applying it | ||
78 | (what I assume you've done in the examples below), then you simply run | ||
79 | gunzip or bunzip2 on the file - like this: | ||
80 | gunzip patch-x.y.z.gz | ||
81 | bunzip2 patch-x.y.z.bz2 | ||
82 | |||
83 | Which will leave you with a plain text patch-x.y.z file that you can feed to | ||
84 | patch via stdin or the -i argument, as you prefer. | ||
85 | |||
86 | A few other nice arguments for patch are -s which causes patch to be silent | ||
87 | except for errors which is nice to prevent errors from scrolling out of the | ||
88 | screen too fast, and --dry-run which causes patch to just print a listing of | ||
89 | what would happen, but doesn't actually make any changes. Finally --verbose | ||
90 | tells patch to print more information about the work being done. | ||
91 | |||
92 | |||
93 | Common errors when patching | ||
94 | --- | ||
95 | When patch applies a patch file it attempts to verify the sanity of the | ||
96 | file in different ways. | ||
97 | Checking that the file looks like a valid patch file, checking the code | ||
98 | around the bits being modified matches the context provided in the patch are | ||
99 | just two of the basic sanity checks patch does. | ||
100 | |||
101 | If patch encounters something that doesn't look quite right it has two | ||
102 | options. It can either refuse to apply the changes and abort or it can try | ||
103 | to find a way to make the patch apply with a few minor changes. | ||
104 | |||
105 | One example of something that's not 'quite right' that patch will attempt to | ||
106 | fix up is if all the context matches, the lines being changed match, but the | ||
107 | line numbers are different. This can happen, for example, if the patch makes | ||
108 | a change in the middle of the file but for some reasons a few lines have | ||
109 | been added or removed near the beginning of the file. In that case | ||
110 | everything looks good it has just moved up or down a bit, and patch will | ||
111 | usually adjust the line numbers and apply the patch. | ||
112 | |||
113 | Whenever patch applies a patch that it had to modify a bit to make it fit | ||
114 | it'll tell you about it by saying the patch applied with 'fuzz'. | ||
115 | You should be wary of such changes since even though patch probably got it | ||
116 | right it doesn't /always/ get it right, and the result will sometimes be | ||
117 | wrong. | ||
118 | |||
119 | When patch encounters a change that it can't fix up with fuzz it rejects it | ||
120 | outright and leaves a file with a .rej extension (a reject file). You can | ||
121 | read this file to see exactely what change couldn't be applied, so you can | ||
122 | go fix it up by hand if you wish. | ||
123 | |||
124 | If you don't have any third party patches applied to your kernel source, but | ||
125 | only patches from kernel.org and you apply the patches in the correct order, | ||
126 | and have made no modifications yourself to the source files, then you should | ||
127 | never see a fuzz or reject message from patch. If you do see such messages | ||
128 | anyway, then there's a high risk that either your local source tree or the | ||
129 | patch file is corrupted in some way. In that case you should probably try | ||
130 | redownloading the patch and if things are still not OK then you'd be advised | ||
131 | to start with a fresh tree downloaded in full from kernel.org. | ||
132 | |||
133 | Let's look a bit more at some of the messages patch can produce. | ||
134 | |||
135 | If patch stops and presents a "File to patch:" prompt, then patch could not | ||
136 | find a file to be patched. Most likely you forgot to specify -p1 or you are | ||
137 | in the wrong directory. Less often, you'll find patches that need to be | ||
138 | applied with -p0 instead of -p1 (reading the patch file should reveal if | ||
139 | this is the case - if so, then this is an error by the person who created | ||
140 | the patch but is not fatal). | ||
141 | |||
142 | If you get "Hunk #2 succeeded at 1887 with fuzz 2 (offset 7 lines)." or a | ||
143 | message similar to that, then it means that patch had to adjust the location | ||
144 | of the change (in this example it needed to move 7 lines from where it | ||
145 | expected to make the change to make it fit). | ||
146 | The resulting file may or may not be OK, depending on the reason the file | ||
147 | was different than expected. | ||
148 | This often happens if you try to apply a patch that was generated against a | ||
149 | different kernel version than the one you are trying to patch. | ||
150 | |||
151 | If you get a message like "Hunk #3 FAILED at 2387.", then it means that the | ||
152 | patch could not be applied correctly and the patch program was unable to | ||
153 | fuzz its way through. This will generate a .rej file with the change that | ||
154 | caused the patch to fail and also a .orig file showing you the original | ||
155 | content that couldn't be changed. | ||
156 | |||
157 | If you get "Reversed (or previously applied) patch detected! Assume -R? [n]" | ||
158 | then patch detected that the change contained in the patch seems to have | ||
159 | already been made. | ||
160 | If you actually did apply this patch previously and you just re-applied it | ||
161 | in error, then just say [n]o and abort this patch. If you applied this patch | ||
162 | previously and actually intended to revert it, but forgot to specify -R, | ||
163 | then you can say [y]es here to make patch revert it for you. | ||
164 | This can also happen if the creator of the patch reversed the source and | ||
165 | destination directories when creating the patch, and in that case reverting | ||
166 | the patch will in fact apply it. | ||
167 | |||
168 | A message similar to "patch: **** unexpected end of file in patch" or "patch | ||
169 | unexpectedly ends in middle of line" means that patch could make no sense of | ||
170 | the file you fed to it. Either your download is broken or you tried to feed | ||
171 | patch a compressed patch file without uncompressing it first. | ||
172 | |||
173 | As I already mentioned above, these errors should never happen if you apply | ||
174 | a patch from kernel.org to the correct version of an unmodified source tree. | ||
175 | So if you get these errors with kernel.org patches then you should probably | ||
176 | assume that either your patch file or your tree is broken and I'd advice you | ||
177 | to start over with a fresh download of a full kernel tree and the patch you | ||
178 | wish to apply. | ||
179 | |||
180 | |||
181 | Are there any alternatives to `patch'? | ||
182 | --- | ||
183 | Yes there are alternatives. You can use the `interdiff' program | ||
184 | (http://cyberelk.net/tim/patchutils/) to generate a patch representing the | ||
185 | differences between two patches and then apply the result. | ||
186 | This will let you move from something like 2.6.12.2 to 2.6.12.3 in a single | ||
187 | step. The -z flag to interdiff will even let you feed it patches in gzip or | ||
188 | bzip2 compressed form directly without the use of zcat or bzcat or manual | ||
189 | decompression. | ||
190 | |||
191 | Here's how you'd go from 2.6.12.2 to 2.6.12.3 in a single step: | ||
192 | interdiff -z ../patch-2.6.12.2.bz2 ../patch-2.6.12.3.gz | patch -p1 | ||
193 | |||
194 | Although interdiff may save you a step or two you are generally advised to | ||
195 | do the additional steps since interdiff can get things wrong in some cases. | ||
196 | |||
197 | Another alternative is `ketchup', which is a python script for automatic | ||
198 | downloading and applying of patches (http://www.selenic.com/ketchup/). | ||
199 | |||
200 | Other nice tools are diffstat which shows a summary of changes made by a | ||
201 | patch, lsdiff which displays a short listing of affected files in a patch | ||
202 | file, along with (optionally) the line numbers of the start of each patch | ||
203 | and grepdiff which displays a list of the files modified by a patch where | ||
204 | the patch contains a given regular expression. | ||
205 | |||
206 | |||
207 | Where can I download the patches? | ||
208 | --- | ||
209 | The patches are available at http://kernel.org/ | ||
210 | Most recent patches are linked from the front page, but they also have | ||
211 | specific homes. | ||
212 | |||
213 | The 2.6.x.y (-stable) and 2.6.x patches live at | ||
214 | ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/ | ||
215 | |||
216 | The -rc patches live at | ||
217 | ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/testing/ | ||
218 | |||
219 | The -git patches live at | ||
220 | ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/snapshots/ | ||
221 | |||
222 | The -mm kernels live at | ||
223 | ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/akpm/patches/2.6/ | ||
224 | |||
225 | In place of ftp.kernel.org you can use ftp.cc.kernel.org, where cc is a | ||
226 | country code. This way you'll be downloading from a mirror site that's most | ||
227 | likely geographically closer to you, resulting in faster downloads for you, | ||
228 | less bandwidth used globally and less load on the main kernel.org servers - | ||
229 | these are good things, do use mirrors when possible. | ||
230 | |||
231 | |||
232 | The 2.6.x kernels | ||
233 | --- | ||
234 | These are the base stable releases released by Linus. The highest numbered | ||
235 | release is the most recent. | ||
236 | |||
237 | If regressions or other serious flaws are found then a -stable fix patch | ||
238 | will be released (see below) on top of this base. Once a new 2.6.x base | ||
239 | kernel is released, a patch is made available that is a delta between the | ||
240 | previous 2.6.x kernel and the new one. | ||
241 | |||
242 | To apply a patch moving from 2.6.11 to 2.6.12 you'd do the following (note | ||
243 | that such patches do *NOT* apply on top of 2.6.x.y kernels but on top of the | ||
244 | base 2.6.x kernel - if you need to move from 2.6.x.y to 2.6.x+1 you need to | ||
245 | first revert the 2.6.x.y patch). | ||
246 | |||
247 | Here are some examples: | ||
248 | |||
249 | # moving from 2.6.11 to 2.6.12 | ||
250 | $ cd ~/linux-2.6.11 # change to kernel source dir | ||
251 | $ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.12 # apply the 2.6.12 patch | ||
252 | $ cd .. | ||
253 | $ mv linux-2.6.11 linux-2.6.12 # rename source dir | ||
254 | |||
255 | # moving from 2.6.11.1 to 2.6.12 | ||
256 | $ cd ~/linux-2.6.11.1 # change to kernel source dir | ||
257 | $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-2.6.11.1 # revert the 2.6.11.1 patch | ||
258 | # source dir is now 2.6.11 | ||
259 | $ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.12 # apply new 2.6.12 patch | ||
260 | $ cd .. | ||
261 | $ mv linux-2.6.11.1 inux-2.6.12 # rename source dir | ||
262 | |||
263 | |||
264 | The 2.6.x.y kernels | ||
265 | --- | ||
266 | Kernels with 4 digit versions are -stable kernels. They contain small(ish) | ||
267 | critical fixes for security problems or significant regressions discovered | ||
268 | in a given 2.6.x kernel. | ||
269 | |||
270 | This is the recommended branch for users who want the most recent stable | ||
271 | kernel and are not interested in helping test development/experimental | ||
272 | versions. | ||
273 | |||
274 | If no 2.6.x.y kernel is available, then the highest numbered 2.6.x kernel is | ||
275 | the current stable kernel. | ||
276 | |||
277 | These patches are not incremental, meaning that for example the 2.6.12.3 | ||
278 | patch does not apply on top of the 2.6.12.2 kernel source, but rather on top | ||
279 | of the base 2.6.12 kernel source. | ||
280 | So, in order to apply the 2.6.12.3 patch to your existing 2.6.12.2 kernel | ||
281 | source you have to first back out the 2.6.12.2 patch (so you are left with a | ||
282 | base 2.6.12 kernel source) and then apply the new 2.6.12.3 patch. | ||
283 | |||
284 | Here's a small example: | ||
285 | |||
286 | $ cd ~/linux-2.6.12.2 # change into the kernel source dir | ||
287 | $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-2.6.12.2 # revert the 2.6.12.2 patch | ||
288 | $ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.12.3 # apply the new 2.6.12.3 patch | ||
289 | $ cd .. | ||
290 | $ mv linux-2.6.12.2 linux-2.6.12.3 # rename the kernel source dir | ||
291 | |||
292 | |||
293 | The -rc kernels | ||
294 | --- | ||
295 | These are release-candidate kernels. These are development kernels released | ||
296 | by Linus whenever he deems the current git (the kernel's source management | ||
297 | tool) tree to be in a reasonably sane state adequate for testing. | ||
298 | |||
299 | These kernels are not stable and you should expect occasional breakage if | ||
300 | you intend to run them. This is however the most stable of the main | ||
301 | development branches and is also what will eventually turn into the next | ||
302 | stable kernel, so it is important that it be tested by as many people as | ||
303 | possible. | ||
304 | |||
305 | This is a good branch to run for people who want to help out testing | ||
306 | development kernels but do not want to run some of the really experimental | ||
307 | stuff (such people should see the sections about -git and -mm kernels below). | ||
308 | |||
309 | The -rc patches are not incremental, they apply to a base 2.6.x kernel, just | ||
310 | like the 2.6.x.y patches described above. The kernel version before the -rcN | ||
311 | suffix denotes the version of the kernel that this -rc kernel will eventually | ||
312 | turn into. | ||
313 | So, 2.6.13-rc5 means that this is the fifth release candidate for the 2.6.13 | ||
314 | kernel and the patch should be applied on top of the 2.6.12 kernel source. | ||
315 | |||
316 | Here are 3 examples of how to apply these patches: | ||
317 | |||
318 | # first an example of moving from 2.6.12 to 2.6.13-rc3 | ||
319 | $ cd ~/linux-2.6.12 # change into the 2.6.12 source dir | ||
320 | $ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.13-rc3 # apply the 2.6.13-rc3 patch | ||
321 | $ cd .. | ||
322 | $ mv linux-2.6.12 linux-2.6.13-rc3 # rename the source dir | ||
323 | |||
324 | # now let's move from 2.6.13-rc3 to 2.6.13-rc5 | ||
325 | $ cd ~/linux-2.6.13-rc3 # change into the 2.6.13-rc3 dir | ||
326 | $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-2.6.13-rc3 # revert the 2.6.13-rc3 patch | ||
327 | $ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.13-rc5 # apply the new 2.6.13-rc5 patch | ||
328 | $ cd .. | ||
329 | $ mv linux-2.6.13-rc3 linux-2.6.13-rc5 # rename the source dir | ||
330 | |||
331 | # finally let's try and move from 2.6.12.3 to 2.6.13-rc5 | ||
332 | $ cd ~/linux-2.6.12.3 # change to the kernel source dir | ||
333 | $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-2.6.12.3 # revert the 2.6.12.3 patch | ||
334 | $ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.13-rc5 # apply new 2.6.13-rc5 patch | ||
335 | $ cd .. | ||
336 | $ mv linux-2.6.12.3 linux-2.6.13-rc5 # rename the kernel source dir | ||
337 | |||
338 | |||
339 | The -git kernels | ||
340 | --- | ||
341 | These are daily snapshots of Linus' kernel tree (managed in a git | ||
342 | repository, hence the name). | ||
343 | |||
344 | These patches are usually released daily and represent the current state of | ||
345 | Linus' tree. They are more experimental than -rc kernels since they are | ||
346 | generated automatically without even a cursory glance to see if they are | ||
347 | sane. | ||
348 | |||
349 | -git patches are not incremental and apply either to a base 2.6.x kernel or | ||
350 | a base 2.6.x-rc kernel - you can see which from their name. | ||
351 | A patch named 2.6.12-git1 applies to the 2.6.12 kernel source and a patch | ||
352 | named 2.6.13-rc3-git2 applies to the source of the 2.6.13-rc3 kernel. | ||
353 | |||
354 | Here are some examples of how to apply these patches: | ||
355 | |||
356 | # moving from 2.6.12 to 2.6.12-git1 | ||
357 | $ cd ~/linux-2.6.12 # change to the kernel source dir | ||
358 | $ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.12-git1 # apply the 2.6.12-git1 patch | ||
359 | $ cd .. | ||
360 | $ mv linux-2.6.12 linux-2.6.12-git1 # rename the kernel source dir | ||
361 | |||
362 | # moving from 2.6.12-git1 to 2.6.13-rc2-git3 | ||
363 | $ cd ~/linux-2.6.12-git1 # change to the kernel source dir | ||
364 | $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-2.6.12-git1 # revert the 2.6.12-git1 patch | ||
365 | # we now have a 2.6.12 kernel | ||
366 | $ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.13-rc2 # apply the 2.6.13-rc2 patch | ||
367 | # the kernel is now 2.6.13-rc2 | ||
368 | $ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.13-rc2-git3 # apply the 2.6.13-rc2-git3 patch | ||
369 | # the kernel is now 2.6.13-rc2-git3 | ||
370 | $ cd .. | ||
371 | $ mv linux-2.6.12-git1 linux-2.6.13-rc2-git3 # rename source dir | ||
372 | |||
373 | |||
374 | The -mm kernels | ||
375 | --- | ||
376 | These are experimental kernels released by Andrew Morton. | ||
377 | |||
378 | The -mm tree serves as a sort of proving ground for new features and other | ||
379 | experimental patches. | ||
380 | Once a patch has proved its worth in -mm for a while Andrew pushes it on to | ||
381 | Linus for inclusion in mainline. | ||
382 | |||
383 | Although it's encouraged that patches flow to Linus via the -mm tree, this | ||
384 | is not always enforced. | ||
385 | Subsystem maintainers (or individuals) sometimes push their patches directly | ||
386 | to Linus, even though (or after) they have been merged and tested in -mm (or | ||
387 | sometimes even without prior testing in -mm). | ||
388 | |||
389 | You should generally strive to get your patches into mainline via -mm to | ||
390 | ensure maximum testing. | ||
391 | |||
392 | This branch is in constant flux and contains many experimental features, a | ||
393 | lot of debugging patches not appropriate for mainline etc and is the most | ||
394 | experimental of the branches described in this document. | ||
395 | |||
396 | These kernels are not appropriate for use on systems that are supposed to be | ||
397 | stable and they are more risky to run than any of the other branches (make | ||
398 | sure you have up-to-date backups - that goes for any experimental kernel but | ||
399 | even more so for -mm kernels). | ||
400 | |||
401 | These kernels in addition to all the other experimental patches they contain | ||
402 | usually also contain any changes in the mainline -git kernels available at | ||
403 | the time of release. | ||
404 | |||
405 | Testing of -mm kernels is greatly appreciated since the whole point of the | ||
406 | tree is to weed out regressions, crashes, data corruption bugs, build | ||
407 | breakage (and any other bug in general) before changes are merged into the | ||
408 | more stable mainline Linus tree. | ||
409 | But testers of -mm should be aware that breakage in this tree is more common | ||
410 | than in any other tree. | ||
411 | |||
412 | The -mm kernels are not released on a fixed schedule, but usually a few -mm | ||
413 | kernels are released in between each -rc kernel (1 to 3 is common). | ||
414 | The -mm kernels apply to either a base 2.6.x kernel (when no -rc kernels | ||
415 | have been released yet) or to a Linus -rc kernel. | ||
416 | |||
417 | Here are some examples of applying the -mm patches: | ||
418 | |||
419 | # moving from 2.6.12 to 2.6.12-mm1 | ||
420 | $ cd ~/linux-2.6.12 # change to the 2.6.12 source dir | ||
421 | $ patch -p1 < ../2.6.12-mm1 # apply the 2.6.12-mm1 patch | ||
422 | $ cd .. | ||
423 | $ mv linux-2.6.12 linux-2.6.12-mm1 # rename the source appropriately | ||
424 | |||
425 | # moving from 2.6.12-mm1 to 2.6.13-rc3-mm3 | ||
426 | $ cd ~/linux-2.6.12-mm1 | ||
427 | $ patch -p1 -R < ../2.6.12-mm1 # revert the 2.6.12-mm1 patch | ||
428 | # we now have a 2.6.12 source | ||
429 | $ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.13-rc3 # apply the 2.6.13-rc3 patch | ||
430 | # we now have a 2.6.13-rc3 source | ||
431 | $ patch -p1 < ../2.6.13-rc3-mm3 # apply the 2.6.13-rc3-mm3 patch | ||
432 | $ cd .. | ||
433 | $ mv linux-2.6.12-mm1 linux-2.6.13-rc3-mm3 # rename the source dir | ||
434 | |||
435 | |||
436 | This concludes this list of explanations of the various kernel trees and I | ||
437 | hope you are now crystal clear on how to apply the various patches and help | ||
438 | testing the kernel. | ||
439 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/sonycd535 b/Documentation/cdrom/sonycd535 index 59581a4b302a..b81e109970aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/cdrom/sonycd535 +++ b/Documentation/cdrom/sonycd535 | |||
@@ -68,7 +68,8 @@ it a better device citizen. Further thanks to Joel Katz | |||
68 | Porfiri Claudio <C.Porfiri@nisms.tei.ericsson.se> for patches | 68 | Porfiri Claudio <C.Porfiri@nisms.tei.ericsson.se> for patches |
69 | to make the driver work with the older CDU-510/515 series, and | 69 | to make the driver work with the older CDU-510/515 series, and |
70 | Heiko Eissfeldt <heiko@colossus.escape.de> for pointing out that | 70 | Heiko Eissfeldt <heiko@colossus.escape.de> for pointing out that |
71 | the verify_area() checks were ignoring the results of said checks. | 71 | the verify_area() checks were ignoring the results of said checks |
72 | (note: verify_area() has since been replaced by access_ok()). | ||
72 | 73 | ||
73 | (Acknowledgments from Ron Jeppesen in the 0.3 release:) | 74 | (Acknowledgments from Ron Jeppesen in the 0.3 release:) |
74 | Thanks to Corey Minyard who wrote the original CDU-31A driver on which | 75 | Thanks to Corey Minyard who wrote the original CDU-31A driver on which |
diff --git a/Documentation/cpusets.txt b/Documentation/cpusets.txt index ad944c060312..47f4114fbf54 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpusets.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpusets.txt | |||
@@ -60,6 +60,18 @@ all of the cpus in the system. This removes any overhead due to | |||
60 | load balancing code trying to pull tasks outside of the cpu exclusive | 60 | load balancing code trying to pull tasks outside of the cpu exclusive |
61 | cpuset only to be prevented by the tasks' cpus_allowed mask. | 61 | cpuset only to be prevented by the tasks' cpus_allowed mask. |
62 | 62 | ||
63 | A cpuset that is mem_exclusive restricts kernel allocations for | ||
64 | page, buffer and other data commonly shared by the kernel across | ||
65 | multiple users. All cpusets, whether mem_exclusive or not, restrict | ||
66 | allocations of memory for user space. This enables configuring a | ||
67 | system so that several independent jobs can share common kernel | ||
68 | data, such as file system pages, while isolating each jobs user | ||
69 | allocation in its own cpuset. To do this, construct a large | ||
70 | mem_exclusive cpuset to hold all the jobs, and construct child, | ||
71 | non-mem_exclusive cpusets for each individual job. Only a small | ||
72 | amount of typical kernel memory, such as requests from interrupt | ||
73 | handlers, is allowed to be taken outside even a mem_exclusive cpuset. | ||
74 | |||
63 | User level code may create and destroy cpusets by name in the cpuset | 75 | User level code may create and destroy cpusets by name in the cpuset |
64 | virtual file system, manage the attributes and permissions of these | 76 | virtual file system, manage the attributes and permissions of these |
65 | cpusets and which CPUs and Memory Nodes are assigned to each cpuset, | 77 | cpusets and which CPUs and Memory Nodes are assigned to each cpuset, |
diff --git a/Documentation/crypto/api-intro.txt b/Documentation/crypto/api-intro.txt index a2d5b4900772..74dffc68ff9f 100644 --- a/Documentation/crypto/api-intro.txt +++ b/Documentation/crypto/api-intro.txt | |||
@@ -223,6 +223,7 @@ CAST5 algorithm contributors: | |||
223 | 223 | ||
224 | TEA/XTEA algorithm contributors: | 224 | TEA/XTEA algorithm contributors: |
225 | Aaron Grothe | 225 | Aaron Grothe |
226 | Michael Ringe | ||
226 | 227 | ||
227 | Khazad algorithm contributors: | 228 | Khazad algorithm contributors: |
228 | Aaron Grothe | 229 | Aaron Grothe |
diff --git a/Documentation/dcdbas.txt b/Documentation/dcdbas.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e1c52e2dc361 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/dcdbas.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ | |||
1 | Overview | ||
2 | |||
3 | The Dell Systems Management Base Driver provides a sysfs interface for | ||
4 | systems management software such as Dell OpenManage to perform system | ||
5 | management interrupts and host control actions (system power cycle or | ||
6 | power off after OS shutdown) on certain Dell systems. | ||
7 | |||
8 | Dell OpenManage requires this driver on the following Dell PowerEdge systems: | ||
9 | 300, 1300, 1400, 400SC, 500SC, 1500SC, 1550, 600SC, 1600SC, 650, 1655MC, | ||
10 | 700, and 750. Other Dell software such as the open source libsmbios project | ||
11 | is expected to make use of this driver, and it may include the use of this | ||
12 | driver on other Dell systems. | ||
13 | |||
14 | The Dell libsmbios project aims towards providing access to as much BIOS | ||
15 | information as possible. See http://linux.dell.com/libsmbios/main/ for | ||
16 | more information about the libsmbios project. | ||
17 | |||
18 | |||
19 | System Management Interrupt | ||
20 | |||
21 | On some Dell systems, systems management software must access certain | ||
22 | management information via a system management interrupt (SMI). The SMI data | ||
23 | buffer must reside in 32-bit address space, and the physical address of the | ||
24 | buffer is required for the SMI. The driver maintains the memory required for | ||
25 | the SMI and provides a way for the application to generate the SMI. | ||
26 | The driver creates the following sysfs entries for systems management | ||
27 | software to perform these system management interrupts: | ||
28 | |||
29 | /sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data | ||
30 | /sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data_buf_phys_addr | ||
31 | /sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data_buf_size | ||
32 | /sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_request | ||
33 | |||
34 | Systems management software must perform the following steps to execute | ||
35 | a SMI using this driver: | ||
36 | |||
37 | 1) Lock smi_data. | ||
38 | 2) Write system management command to smi_data. | ||
39 | 3) Write "1" to smi_request to generate a calling interface SMI or | ||
40 | "2" to generate a raw SMI. | ||
41 | 4) Read system management command response from smi_data. | ||
42 | 5) Unlock smi_data. | ||
43 | |||
44 | |||
45 | Host Control Action | ||
46 | |||
47 | Dell OpenManage supports a host control feature that allows the administrator | ||
48 | to perform a power cycle or power off of the system after the OS has finished | ||
49 | shutting down. On some Dell systems, this host control feature requires that | ||
50 | a driver perform a SMI after the OS has finished shutting down. | ||
51 | |||
52 | The driver creates the following sysfs entries for systems management software | ||
53 | to schedule the driver to perform a power cycle or power off host control | ||
54 | action after the system has finished shutting down: | ||
55 | |||
56 | /sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/host_control_action | ||
57 | /sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/host_control_smi_type | ||
58 | /sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/host_control_on_shutdown | ||
59 | |||
60 | Dell OpenManage performs the following steps to execute a power cycle or | ||
61 | power off host control action using this driver: | ||
62 | |||
63 | 1) Write host control action to be performed to host_control_action. | ||
64 | 2) Write type of SMI that driver needs to perform to host_control_smi_type. | ||
65 | 3) Write "1" to host_control_on_shutdown to enable host control action. | ||
66 | 4) Initiate OS shutdown. | ||
67 | (Driver will perform host control SMI when it is notified that the OS | ||
68 | has finished shutting down.) | ||
69 | |||
70 | |||
71 | Host Control SMI Type | ||
72 | |||
73 | The following table shows the value to write to host_control_smi_type to | ||
74 | perform a power cycle or power off host control action: | ||
75 | |||
76 | PowerEdge System Host Control SMI Type | ||
77 | ---------------- --------------------- | ||
78 | 300 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE1 | ||
79 | 1300 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE1 | ||
80 | 1400 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 | ||
81 | 500SC HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 | ||
82 | 1500SC HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 | ||
83 | 1550 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 | ||
84 | 600SC HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 | ||
85 | 1600SC HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 | ||
86 | 650 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 | ||
87 | 1655MC HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 | ||
88 | 700 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE3 | ||
89 | 750 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE3 | ||
90 | |||
91 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt b/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bcfa5c35036b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ | |||
1 | Purpose: | ||
2 | Demonstrate the usage of the new open sourced rbu (Remote BIOS Update) driver | ||
3 | for updating BIOS images on Dell servers and desktops. | ||
4 | |||
5 | Scope: | ||
6 | This document discusses the functionality of the rbu driver only. | ||
7 | It does not cover the support needed from aplications to enable the BIOS to | ||
8 | update itself with the image downloaded in to the memory. | ||
9 | |||
10 | Overview: | ||
11 | This driver works with Dell OpenManage or Dell Update Packages for updating | ||
12 | the BIOS on Dell servers (starting from servers sold since 1999), desktops | ||
13 | and notebooks (starting from those sold in 2005). | ||
14 | Please go to http://support.dell.com register and you can find info on | ||
15 | OpenManage and Dell Update packages (DUP). | ||
16 | |||
17 | Dell_RBU driver supports BIOS update using the monilothic image and packetized | ||
18 | image methods. In case of moniolithic the driver allocates a contiguous chunk | ||
19 | of physical pages having the BIOS image. In case of packetized the app | ||
20 | using the driver breaks the image in to packets of fixed sizes and the driver | ||
21 | would place each packet in contiguous physical memory. The driver also | ||
22 | maintains a link list of packets for reading them back. | ||
23 | If the dell_rbu driver is unloaded all the allocated memory is freed. | ||
24 | |||
25 | The rbu driver needs to have an application which will inform the BIOS to | ||
26 | enable the update in the next system reboot. | ||
27 | |||
28 | The user should not unload the rbu driver after downloading the BIOS image | ||
29 | or updating. | ||
30 | |||
31 | The driver load creates the following directories under the /sys file system. | ||
32 | /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading | ||
33 | /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data | ||
34 | /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type | ||
35 | /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/data | ||
36 | |||
37 | The driver supports two types of update mechanism; monolithic and packetized. | ||
38 | These update mechanism depends upon the BIOS currently running on the system. | ||
39 | Most of the Dell systems support a monolithic update where the BIOS image is | ||
40 | copied to a single contiguous block of physical memory. | ||
41 | In case of packet mechanism the single memory can be broken in smaller chuks | ||
42 | of contiguous memory and the BIOS image is scattered in these packets. | ||
43 | |||
44 | By default the driver uses monolithic memory for the update type. This can be | ||
45 | changed to contiguous during the driver load time by specifying the load | ||
46 | parameter image_type=packet. This can also be changed later as below | ||
47 | echo packet > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type | ||
48 | |||
49 | Do the steps below to download the BIOS image. | ||
50 | 1) echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading | ||
51 | 2) cp bios_image.hdr /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data | ||
52 | 3) echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading | ||
53 | |||
54 | The /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/ entries will remain till the following is | ||
55 | done. | ||
56 | echo -1 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading | ||
57 | |||
58 | Until this step is completed the drivr cannot be unloaded. | ||
59 | |||
60 | Also the driver provides /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/data readonly file to | ||
61 | read back the image downloaded. This is useful in case of packet update | ||
62 | mechanism where the above steps 1,2,3 will repeated for every packet. | ||
63 | By reading the /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/data file all packet data | ||
64 | downloaded can be verified in a single file. | ||
65 | The packets are arranged in this file one after the other in a FIFO order. | ||
66 | |||
67 | NOTE: | ||
68 | This driver requires a patch for firmware_class.c which has the addition | ||
69 | of request_firmware_nowait_nohotplug function to wortk | ||
70 | Also after updating the BIOS image an user mdoe application neeeds to execute | ||
71 | code which message the BIOS update request to the BIOS. So on the next reboot | ||
72 | the BIOS knows about the new image downloaded and it updates it self. | ||
73 | Also don't unload the rbu drive if the image has to be updated. | ||
74 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/bt8xx.txt b/Documentation/dvb/bt8xx.txt index e6b8d05bc08d..cb63b7a93c82 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/bt8xx.txt +++ b/Documentation/dvb/bt8xx.txt | |||
@@ -1,55 +1,74 @@ | |||
1 | How to get the Nebula Electronics DigiTV, Pinnacle PCTV Sat, Twinhan DST + clones working | 1 | How to get the Nebula, PCTV and Twinhan DST cards working |
2 | ========================================================================================= | 2 | ========================================================= |
3 | 3 | ||
4 | 1) General information | 4 | This class of cards has a bt878a as the PCI interface, and |
5 | ====================== | 5 | require the bttv driver. |
6 | 6 | ||
7 | This class of cards has a bt878a chip as the PCI interface. | 7 | Please pay close attention to the warning about the bttv module |
8 | The different card drivers require the bttv driver to provide the means | 8 | options below for the DST card. |
9 | to access the i2c bus and the gpio pins of the bt8xx chipset. | ||
10 | 9 | ||
11 | 2) Compilation rules for Kernel >= 2.6.12 | 10 | 1) General informations |
12 | ========================================= | 11 | ======================= |
13 | 12 | ||
14 | Enable the following options: | 13 | These drivers require the bttv driver to provide the means to access |
14 | the i2c bus and the gpio pins of the bt8xx chipset. | ||
15 | 15 | ||
16 | Because of this, you need to enable | ||
16 | "Device drivers" => "Multimedia devices" | 17 | "Device drivers" => "Multimedia devices" |
17 | => "Video For Linux" => "BT848 Video For Linux" | 18 | => "Video For Linux" => "BT848 Video For Linux" |
19 | |||
20 | Furthermore you need to enable | ||
18 | "Device drivers" => "Multimedia devices" => "Digital Video Broadcasting Devices" | 21 | "Device drivers" => "Multimedia devices" => "Digital Video Broadcasting Devices" |
19 | => "DVB for Linux" "DVB Core Support" "Nebula/Pinnacle PCTV/TwinHan PCI Cards" | 22 | => "DVB for Linux" "DVB Core Support" "BT8xx based PCI cards" |
20 | 23 | ||
21 | 3) Loading Modules, described by two approaches | 24 | 2) Loading Modules |
22 | =============================================== | 25 | ================== |
23 | 26 | ||
24 | In general you need to load the bttv driver, which will handle the gpio and | 27 | In general you need to load the bttv driver, which will handle the gpio and |
25 | i2c communication for us, plus the common dvb-bt8xx device driver, | 28 | i2c communication for us, plus the common dvb-bt8xx device driver. |
26 | which is called the backend. | 29 | The frontends for Nebula (nxt6000), Pinnacle PCTV (cx24110) and |
27 | The frontends for Nebula DigiTV (nxt6000), Pinnacle PCTV Sat (cx24110), | 30 | TwinHan (dst) are loaded automatically by the dvb-bt8xx device driver. |
28 | TwinHan DST + clones (dst and dst-ca) are loaded automatically by the backend. | ||
29 | For further details about TwinHan DST + clones see /Documentation/dvb/ci.txt. | ||
30 | 31 | ||
31 | 3a) The manual approach | 32 | 3a) Nebula / Pinnacle PCTV |
32 | ----------------------- | 33 | -------------------------- |
33 | 34 | ||
34 | Loading modules: | 35 | $ modprobe bttv (normally bttv is being loaded automatically by kmod) |
35 | modprobe bttv | 36 | $ modprobe dvb-bt8xx (or just place dvb-bt8xx in /etc/modules for automatic loading) |
36 | modprobe dvb-bt8xx | ||
37 | 37 | ||
38 | Unloading modules: | ||
39 | modprobe -r dvb-bt8xx | ||
40 | modprobe -r bttv | ||
41 | 38 | ||
42 | 3b) The automatic approach | 39 | 3b) TwinHan and Clones |
43 | -------------------------- | 40 | -------------------------- |
44 | 41 | ||
45 | If not already done by installation, place a line either in | 42 | $ modprobe bttv i2c_hw=1 card=0x71 |
46 | /etc/modules.conf or in /etc/modprobe.conf containing this text: | 43 | $ modprobe dvb-bt8xx |
47 | alias char-major-81 bttv | 44 | $ modprobe dst |
45 | |||
46 | The value 0x71 will override the PCI type detection for dvb-bt8xx, | ||
47 | which is necessary for TwinHan cards. | ||
48 | |||
49 | If you're having an older card (blue color circuit) and card=0x71 locks | ||
50 | your machine, try using 0x68, too. If that does not work, ask on the | ||
51 | mailing list. | ||
52 | |||
53 | The DST module takes a couple of useful parameters. | ||
54 | |||
55 | verbose takes values 0 to 4. These values control the verbosity level, | ||
56 | and can be used to debug also. | ||
57 | |||
58 | verbose=0 means complete disabling of messages | ||
59 | 1 only error messages are displayed | ||
60 | 2 notifications are also displayed | ||
61 | 3 informational messages are also displayed | ||
62 | 4 debug setting | ||
63 | |||
64 | dst_addons takes values 0 and 0x20. A value of 0 means it is a FTA card. | ||
65 | 0x20 means it has a Conditional Access slot. | ||
66 | |||
67 | The autodected values are determined bythe cards 'response | ||
68 | string' which you can see in your logs e.g. | ||
48 | 69 | ||
49 | Then place a line in /etc/modules containing this text: | 70 | dst_get_device_id: Recognise [DSTMCI] |
50 | dvb-bt8xx | ||
51 | 71 | ||
52 | Reboot your system and have fun! | ||
53 | 72 | ||
54 | -- | 73 | -- |
55 | Authors: Richard Walker, Jamie Honan, Michael Hunold, Manu Abraham, Uwe Bugla | 74 | Authors: Richard Walker, Jamie Honan, Michael Hunold, Manu Abraham |
diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/ci.txt b/Documentation/dvb/ci.txt index 62e0701b542a..95f0e73b2135 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/ci.txt +++ b/Documentation/dvb/ci.txt | |||
@@ -23,7 +23,6 @@ This application requires the following to function properly as of now. | |||
23 | eg: $ szap -c channels.conf -r "TMC" -x | 23 | eg: $ szap -c channels.conf -r "TMC" -x |
24 | 24 | ||
25 | (b) a channels.conf containing a valid PMT PID | 25 | (b) a channels.conf containing a valid PMT PID |
26 | |||
27 | eg: TMC:11996:h:0:27500:278:512:650:321 | 26 | eg: TMC:11996:h:0:27500:278:512:650:321 |
28 | 27 | ||
29 | here 278 is a valid PMT PID. the rest of the values are the | 28 | here 278 is a valid PMT PID. the rest of the values are the |
@@ -31,13 +30,7 @@ This application requires the following to function properly as of now. | |||
31 | 30 | ||
32 | (c) after running a szap, you have to run ca_zap, for the | 31 | (c) after running a szap, you have to run ca_zap, for the |
33 | descrambler to function, | 32 | descrambler to function, |
34 | 33 | eg: $ ca_zap channels.conf "TMC" | |
35 | eg: $ ca_zap patched_channels.conf "TMC" | ||
36 | |||
37 | The patched means a patch to apply to scan, such that scan can | ||
38 | generate a channels.conf_with pmt, which has this PMT PID info | ||
39 | (NOTE: szap cannot use this channels.conf with the PMT_PID) | ||
40 | |||
41 | 34 | ||
42 | (d) Hopeflly Enjoy your favourite subscribed channel as you do with | 35 | (d) Hopeflly Enjoy your favourite subscribed channel as you do with |
43 | a FTA card. | 36 | a FTA card. |
diff --git a/Documentation/exception.txt b/Documentation/exception.txt index f1d436993eb1..3cb39ade290e 100644 --- a/Documentation/exception.txt +++ b/Documentation/exception.txt | |||
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ To protect itself the kernel has to verify this address. | |||
7 | 7 | ||
8 | In older versions of Linux this was done with the | 8 | In older versions of Linux this was done with the |
9 | int verify_area(int type, const void * addr, unsigned long size) | 9 | int verify_area(int type, const void * addr, unsigned long size) |
10 | function. | 10 | function (which has since been replaced by access_ok()). |
11 | 11 | ||
12 | This function verified that the memory area starting at address | 12 | This function verified that the memory area starting at address |
13 | addr and of size size was accessible for the operation specified | 13 | addr and of size size was accessible for the operation specified |
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/bugs b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/bugs new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f90cc66ea919 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/bugs | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ | |||
1 | Bugs | ||
2 | ==== | ||
3 | |||
4 | I currently don't know of any bug. Please do send reports to: | ||
5 | - linux-fbdev-devel@lists.sourceforge.net | ||
6 | - Knut_Petersen@t-online.de. | ||
7 | |||
8 | |||
9 | Untested features | ||
10 | ================= | ||
11 | |||
12 | All LCD stuff is untested. If it worked in tridentfb, it should work in | ||
13 | cyblafb. Please test and report the results to Knut_Petersen@t-online.de. | ||
14 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/credits b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/credits new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0eb3b443dc2b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/credits | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ | |||
1 | Thanks to | ||
2 | ========= | ||
3 | * Alan Hourihane, for writing the X trident driver | ||
4 | * Jani Monoses, for writing the tridentfb driver | ||
5 | * Antonino A. Daplas, for review of the first published | ||
6 | version of cyblafb and some code | ||
7 | * Jochen Hein, for testing and a helpfull bug report | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/documentation b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/documentation new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bb1aac048425 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/documentation | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ | |||
1 | Available Documentation | ||
2 | ======================= | ||
3 | |||
4 | Apollo PLE 133 Chipset VT8601A North Bridge Datasheet, Rev. 1.82, October 22, | ||
5 | 2001, available from VIA: | ||
6 | |||
7 | http://www.viavpsd.com/product/6/15/DS8601A182.pdf | ||
8 | |||
9 | The datasheet is incomplete, some registers that need to be programmed are not | ||
10 | explained at all and important bits are listed as "reserved". But you really | ||
11 | need the datasheet to understand the code. "p. xxx" comments refer to page | ||
12 | numbers of this document. | ||
13 | |||
14 | XFree/XOrg drivers are available and of good quality, looking at the code | ||
15 | there is a good idea if the datasheet does not provide enough information | ||
16 | or if the datasheet seems to be wrong. | ||
17 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/fb.modes b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/fb.modes new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cf4351fc32ff --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/fb.modes | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ | |||
1 | # | ||
2 | # Sample fb.modes file | ||
3 | # | ||
4 | # Provides an incomplete list of working modes for | ||
5 | # the cyberblade/i1 graphics core. | ||
6 | # | ||
7 | # The value 4294967256 is used instead of -40. Of course, -40 is not | ||
8 | # a really reasonable value, but chip design does not always follow | ||
9 | # logic. Believe me, it's ok, and it's the way the BIOS does it. | ||
10 | # | ||
11 | # fbset requires 4294967256 in fb.modes and -40 as an argument to | ||
12 | # the -t parameter. That's also not too reasonable, and it might change | ||
13 | # in the future or might even be differt for your current version. | ||
14 | # | ||
15 | |||
16 | mode "640x480-50" | ||
17 | geometry 640 480 640 3756 8 | ||
18 | timings 47619 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3 | ||
19 | endmode | ||
20 | |||
21 | mode "640x480-60" | ||
22 | geometry 640 480 640 3756 8 | ||
23 | timings 39682 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3 | ||
24 | endmode | ||
25 | |||
26 | mode "640x480-70" | ||
27 | geometry 640 480 640 3756 8 | ||
28 | timings 34013 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3 | ||
29 | endmode | ||
30 | |||
31 | mode "640x480-72" | ||
32 | geometry 640 480 640 3756 8 | ||
33 | timings 33068 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3 | ||
34 | endmode | ||
35 | |||
36 | mode "640x480-75" | ||
37 | geometry 640 480 640 3756 8 | ||
38 | timings 31746 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3 | ||
39 | endmode | ||
40 | |||
41 | mode "640x480-80" | ||
42 | geometry 640 480 640 3756 8 | ||
43 | timings 29761 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3 | ||
44 | endmode | ||
45 | |||
46 | mode "640x480-85" | ||
47 | geometry 640 480 640 3756 8 | ||
48 | timings 28011 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3 | ||
49 | endmode | ||
50 | |||
51 | mode "800x600-50" | ||
52 | geometry 800 600 800 3221 8 | ||
53 | timings 30303 96 24 14 0 136 11 | ||
54 | endmode | ||
55 | |||
56 | mode "800x600-60" | ||
57 | geometry 800 600 800 3221 8 | ||
58 | timings 25252 96 24 14 0 136 11 | ||
59 | endmode | ||
60 | |||
61 | mode "800x600-70" | ||
62 | geometry 800 600 800 3221 8 | ||
63 | timings 21645 96 24 14 0 136 11 | ||
64 | endmode | ||
65 | |||
66 | mode "800x600-72" | ||
67 | geometry 800 600 800 3221 8 | ||
68 | timings 21043 96 24 14 0 136 11 | ||
69 | endmode | ||
70 | |||
71 | mode "800x600-75" | ||
72 | geometry 800 600 800 3221 8 | ||
73 | timings 20202 96 24 14 0 136 11 | ||
74 | endmode | ||
75 | |||
76 | mode "800x600-80" | ||
77 | geometry 800 600 800 3221 8 | ||
78 | timings 18939 96 24 14 0 136 11 | ||
79 | endmode | ||
80 | |||
81 | mode "800x600-85" | ||
82 | geometry 800 600 800 3221 8 | ||
83 | timings 17825 96 24 14 0 136 11 | ||
84 | endmode | ||
85 | |||
86 | mode "1024x768-50" | ||
87 | geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8 | ||
88 | timings 19054 144 24 29 0 120 3 | ||
89 | endmode | ||
90 | |||
91 | mode "1024x768-60" | ||
92 | geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8 | ||
93 | timings 15880 144 24 29 0 120 3 | ||
94 | endmode | ||
95 | |||
96 | mode "1024x768-70" | ||
97 | geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8 | ||
98 | timings 13610 144 24 29 0 120 3 | ||
99 | endmode | ||
100 | |||
101 | mode "1024x768-72" | ||
102 | geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8 | ||
103 | timings 13232 144 24 29 0 120 3 | ||
104 | endmode | ||
105 | |||
106 | mode "1024x768-75" | ||
107 | geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8 | ||
108 | timings 12703 144 24 29 0 120 3 | ||
109 | endmode | ||
110 | |||
111 | mode "1024x768-80" | ||
112 | geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8 | ||
113 | timings 11910 144 24 29 0 120 3 | ||
114 | endmode | ||
115 | |||
116 | mode "1024x768-85" | ||
117 | geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8 | ||
118 | timings 11209 144 24 29 0 120 3 | ||
119 | endmode | ||
120 | |||
121 | mode "1280x1024-50" | ||
122 | geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8 | ||
123 | timings 11114 232 16 39 0 160 3 | ||
124 | endmode | ||
125 | |||
126 | mode "1280x1024-60" | ||
127 | geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8 | ||
128 | timings 9262 232 16 39 0 160 3 | ||
129 | endmode | ||
130 | |||
131 | mode "1280x1024-70" | ||
132 | geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8 | ||
133 | timings 7939 232 16 39 0 160 3 | ||
134 | endmode | ||
135 | |||
136 | mode "1280x1024-72" | ||
137 | geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8 | ||
138 | timings 7719 232 16 39 0 160 3 | ||
139 | endmode | ||
140 | |||
141 | mode "1280x1024-75" | ||
142 | geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8 | ||
143 | timings 7410 232 16 39 0 160 3 | ||
144 | endmode | ||
145 | |||
146 | mode "1280x1024-80" | ||
147 | geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8 | ||
148 | timings 6946 232 16 39 0 160 3 | ||
149 | endmode | ||
150 | |||
151 | mode "1280x1024-85" | ||
152 | geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8 | ||
153 | timings 6538 232 16 39 0 160 3 | ||
154 | endmode | ||
155 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/performance b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/performance new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..eb4e47a9cea6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/performance | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ | |||
1 | Speed | ||
2 | ===== | ||
3 | |||
4 | CyBlaFB is much faster than tridentfb and vesafb. Compare the performance data | ||
5 | for mode 1280x1024-[8,16,32]@61 Hz. | ||
6 | |||
7 | Test 1: Cat a file with 2000 lines of 0 characters. | ||
8 | Test 2: Cat a file with 2000 lines of 80 characters. | ||
9 | Test 3: Cat a file with 2000 lines of 160 characters. | ||
10 | |||
11 | All values show system time use in seconds, kernel 2.6.12 was used for | ||
12 | the measurements. 2.6.13 is a bit slower, 2.6.14 hopefully will include a | ||
13 | patch that speeds up kernel bitblitting a lot ( > 20%). | ||
14 | |||
15 | +-----------+-----------------------------------------------------+ | ||
16 | | | not accelerated | | ||
17 | | TRIDENTFB +-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+ | ||
18 | | of 2.6.12 | 8 bpp | 16 bpp | 32 bpp | | ||
19 | | | noypan | ypan | noypan | ypan | noypan | ypan | | ||
20 | +-----------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+ | ||
21 | | Test 1 | 4.31 | 4.33 | 6.05 | 12.81 | ---- | ---- | | ||
22 | | Test 2 | 67.94 | 5.44 | 123.16 | 14.79 | ---- | ---- | | ||
23 | | Test 3 | 131.36 | 6.55 | 240.12 | 16.76 | ---- | ---- | | ||
24 | +-----------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+ | ||
25 | | Comments | | | completely bro- | | ||
26 | | | | | ken, monitor | | ||
27 | | | | | switches off | | ||
28 | +-----------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+ | ||
29 | |||
30 | |||
31 | +-----------+-----------------------------------------------------+ | ||
32 | | | accelerated | | ||
33 | | TRIDENTFB +-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+ | ||
34 | | of 2.6.12 | 8 bpp | 16 bpp | 32 bpp | | ||
35 | | | noypan | ypan | noypan | ypan | noypan | ypan | | ||
36 | +-----------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+ | ||
37 | | Test 1 | ---- | ---- | 20.62 | 1.22 | ---- | ---- | | ||
38 | | Test 2 | ---- | ---- | 22.61 | 3.19 | ---- | ---- | | ||
39 | | Test 3 | ---- | ---- | 24.59 | 5.16 | ---- | ---- | | ||
40 | +-----------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+ | ||
41 | | Comments | broken, writing | broken, ok only | completely bro- | | ||
42 | | | to wrong places | if bgcolor is | ken, monitor | | ||
43 | | | on screen + bug | black, bug in | switches off | | ||
44 | | | in fillrect() | fillrect() | | | ||
45 | +-----------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+ | ||
46 | |||
47 | |||
48 | +-----------+-----------------------------------------------------+ | ||
49 | | | not accelerated | | ||
50 | | VESAFB +-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+ | ||
51 | | of 2.6.12 | 8 bpp | 16 bpp | 32 bpp | | ||
52 | | | noypan | ypan | noypan | ypan | noypan | ypan | | ||
53 | +-----------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+ | ||
54 | | Test 1 | 4.26 | 3.76 | 5.99 | 7.23 | ---- | ---- | | ||
55 | | Test 2 | 65.65 | 4.89 | 120.88 | 9.08 | ---- | ---- | | ||
56 | | Test 3 | 126.91 | 5.94 | 235.77 | 11.03 | ---- | ---- | | ||
57 | +-----------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+ | ||
58 | | Comments | vga=0x307 | vga=0x31a | vga=0x31b not | | ||
59 | | | fh=80kHz | fh=80kHz | supported by | | ||
60 | | | fv=75kHz | fv=75kHz | video BIOS and | | ||
61 | | | | | hardware | | ||
62 | +-----------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+ | ||
63 | |||
64 | |||
65 | +-----------+-----------------------------------------------------+ | ||
66 | | | accelerated | | ||
67 | | CYBLAFB +-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+ | ||
68 | | | 8 bpp | 16 bpp | 32 bpp | | ||
69 | | | noypan | ypan | noypan | ypan | noypan | ypan | | ||
70 | +-----------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+ | ||
71 | | Test 1 | 8.02 | 0.23 | 19.04 | 0.61 | 57.12 | 2.74 | | ||
72 | | Test 2 | 8.38 | 0.55 | 19.39 | 0.92 | 57.54 | 3.13 | | ||
73 | | Test 3 | 8.73 | 0.86 | 19.74 | 1.24 | 57.95 | 3.51 | | ||
74 | +-----------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+ | ||
75 | | Comments | | | | | ||
76 | | | | | | | ||
77 | | | | | | | ||
78 | | | | | | | ||
79 | +-----------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+ | ||
80 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/todo b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/todo new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..80fb2f89b6c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/todo | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ | |||
1 | TODO / Missing features | ||
2 | ======================= | ||
3 | |||
4 | Verify LCD stuff "stretch" and "center" options are | ||
5 | completely untested ... this code needs to be | ||
6 | verified. As I don't have access to such | ||
7 | hardware, please contact me if you are | ||
8 | willing run some tests. | ||
9 | |||
10 | Interlaced video modes The reason that interleaved | ||
11 | modes are disabled is that I do not know | ||
12 | the meaning of the vertical interlace | ||
13 | parameter. Also the datasheet mentions a | ||
14 | bit d8 of a horizontal interlace parameter, | ||
15 | but nowhere the lower 8 bits. Please help | ||
16 | if you can. | ||
17 | |||
18 | low-res double scan modes Who needs it? | ||
19 | |||
20 | accelerated color blitting Who needs it? The console driver does use color | ||
21 | blitting for nothing but drawing the penguine, | ||
22 | everything else is done using color expanding | ||
23 | blitting of 1bpp character bitmaps. | ||
24 | |||
25 | xpanning Who needs it? | ||
26 | |||
27 | ioctls Who needs it? | ||
28 | |||
29 | TV-out Will be done later | ||
30 | |||
31 | ??? Feel free to contact me if you have any | ||
32 | feature requests | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/usage b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/usage new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e627c8f54211 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/usage | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,206 @@ | |||
1 | CyBlaFB is a framebuffer driver for the Cyberblade/i1 graphics core integrated | ||
2 | into the VIA Apollo PLE133 (aka vt8601) south bridge. It is developed and | ||
3 | tested using a VIA EPIA 5000 board. | ||
4 | |||
5 | Cyblafb - compiled into the kernel or as a module? | ||
6 | ================================================== | ||
7 | |||
8 | You might compile cyblafb either as a module or compile it permanently into the | ||
9 | kernel. | ||
10 | |||
11 | Unless you have a real reason to do so you should not compile both vesafb and | ||
12 | cyblafb permanently into the kernel. It's possible and it helps during the | ||
13 | developement cycle, but it's useless and will at least block some otherwise | ||
14 | usefull memory for ordinary users. | ||
15 | |||
16 | Selecting Modes | ||
17 | =============== | ||
18 | |||
19 | Startup Mode | ||
20 | ============ | ||
21 | |||
22 | First of all, you might use the "vga=???" boot parameter as it is | ||
23 | documented in vesafb.txt and svga.txt. Cyblafb will detect the video | ||
24 | mode selected and will use the geometry and timings found by | ||
25 | inspecting the hardware registers. | ||
26 | |||
27 | video=cyblafb vga=0x317 | ||
28 | |||
29 | Alternatively you might use a combination of the mode, ref and bpp | ||
30 | parameters. If you compiled the driver into the kernel, add something | ||
31 | like this to the kernel command line: | ||
32 | |||
33 | video=cyblafb:1280x1024,bpp=16,ref=50 ... | ||
34 | |||
35 | If you compiled the driver as a module, the same mode would be | ||
36 | selected by the following command: | ||
37 | |||
38 | modprobe cyblafb mode=1280x1024 bpp=16 ref=50 ... | ||
39 | |||
40 | None of the modes possible to select as startup modes are affected by | ||
41 | the problems described at the end of the next subsection. | ||
42 | |||
43 | Mode changes using fbset | ||
44 | ======================== | ||
45 | |||
46 | You might use fbset to change the video mode, see "man fbset". Cyblafb | ||
47 | generally does assume that you know what you are doing. But it does | ||
48 | some checks, especially those that are needed to prevent you from | ||
49 | damaging your hardware. | ||
50 | |||
51 | - only 8, 16, 24 and 32 bpp video modes are accepted | ||
52 | - interlaced video modes are not accepted | ||
53 | - double scan video modes are not accepted | ||
54 | - if a flat panel is found, cyblafb does not allow you | ||
55 | to program a resolution higher than the physical | ||
56 | resolution of the flat panel monitor | ||
57 | - cyblafb does not allow xres to differ from xres_virtual | ||
58 | - cyblafb does not allow vclk to exceed 230 MHz. As 32 bpp | ||
59 | and (currently) 24 bit modes use a doubled vclk internally, | ||
60 | the dotclock limit as seen by fbset is 115 MHz for those | ||
61 | modes and 230 MHz for 8 and 16 bpp modes. | ||
62 | |||
63 | Any request that violates the rules given above will be ignored and | ||
64 | fbset will return an error. | ||
65 | |||
66 | If you program a virtual y resolution higher than the hardware limit, | ||
67 | cyblafb will silently decrease that value to the highest possible | ||
68 | value. | ||
69 | |||
70 | Attempts to disable acceleration are ignored. | ||
71 | |||
72 | Some video modes that should work do not work as expected. If you use | ||
73 | the standard fb.modes, fbset 640x480-60 will program that mode, but | ||
74 | you will see a vertical area, about two characters wide, with only | ||
75 | much darker characters than the other characters on the screen. | ||
76 | Cyblafb does allow that mode to be set, as it does not violate the | ||
77 | official specifications. It would need a lot of code to reliably sort | ||
78 | out all invalid modes, playing around with the margin values will | ||
79 | give a valid mode quickly. And if cyblafb would detect such an invalid | ||
80 | mode, should it silently alter the requested values or should it | ||
81 | report an error? Both options have some pros and cons. As stated | ||
82 | above, none of the startup modes are affected, and if you set | ||
83 | verbosity to 1 or higher, cyblafb will print the fbset command that | ||
84 | would be needed to program that mode using fbset. | ||
85 | |||
86 | |||
87 | Other Parameters | ||
88 | ================ | ||
89 | |||
90 | |||
91 | crt don't autodetect, assume monitor connected to | ||
92 | standard VGA connector | ||
93 | |||
94 | fp don't autodetect, assume flat panel display | ||
95 | connected to flat panel monitor interface | ||
96 | |||
97 | nativex inform driver about native x resolution of | ||
98 | flat panel monitor connected to special | ||
99 | interface (should be autodetected) | ||
100 | |||
101 | stretch stretch image to adapt low resolution modes to | ||
102 | higer resolutions of flat panel monitors | ||
103 | connected to special interface | ||
104 | |||
105 | center center image to adapt low resolution modes to | ||
106 | higer resolutions of flat panel monitors | ||
107 | connected to special interface | ||
108 | |||
109 | memsize use if autodetected memsize is wrong ... | ||
110 | should never be necessary | ||
111 | |||
112 | nopcirr disable PCI read retry | ||
113 | nopciwr disable PCI write retry | ||
114 | nopcirb disable PCI read bursts | ||
115 | nopciwb disable PCI write bursts | ||
116 | |||
117 | bpp bpp for specified modes | ||
118 | valid values: 8 || 16 || 24 || 32 | ||
119 | |||
120 | ref refresh rate for specified mode | ||
121 | valid values: 50 <= ref <= 85 | ||
122 | |||
123 | mode 640x480 or 800x600 or 1024x768 or 1280x1024 | ||
124 | if not specified, the startup mode will be detected | ||
125 | and used, so you might also use the vga=??? parameter | ||
126 | described in vesafb.txt. If you do not specify a mode, | ||
127 | bpp and ref parameters are ignored. | ||
128 | |||
129 | verbosity 0 is the default, increase to at least 2 for every | ||
130 | bug report! | ||
131 | |||
132 | vesafb allows cyblafb to be loaded after vesafb has been | ||
133 | loaded. See sections "Module unloading ...". | ||
134 | |||
135 | |||
136 | Development hints | ||
137 | ================= | ||
138 | |||
139 | It's much faster do compile a module and to load the new version after | ||
140 | unloading the old module than to compile a new kernel and to reboot. So if you | ||
141 | try to work on cyblafb, it might be a good idea to use cyblafb as a module. | ||
142 | In real life, fast often means dangerous, and that's also the case here. If | ||
143 | you introduce a serious bug when cyblafb is compiled into the kernel, the | ||
144 | kernel will lock or oops with a high probability before the file system is | ||
145 | mounted, and the danger for your data is low. If you load a broken own version | ||
146 | of cyblafb on a running system, the danger for the integrity of the file | ||
147 | system is much higher as you might need a hard reset afterwards. Decide | ||
148 | yourself. | ||
149 | |||
150 | Module unloading, the vfb method | ||
151 | ================================ | ||
152 | |||
153 | If you want to unload/reload cyblafb using the virtual framebuffer, you need | ||
154 | to enable vfb support in the kernel first. After that, load the modules as | ||
155 | shown below: | ||
156 | |||
157 | modprobe vfb vfb_enable=1 | ||
158 | modprobe fbcon | ||
159 | modprobe cyblafb | ||
160 | fbset -fb /dev/fb1 1280x1024-60 -vyres 2662 | ||
161 | con2fb /dev/fb1 /dev/tty1 | ||
162 | ... | ||
163 | |||
164 | If you now made some changes to cyblafb and want to reload it, you might do it | ||
165 | as show below: | ||
166 | |||
167 | con2fb /dev/fb0 /dev/tty1 | ||
168 | ... | ||
169 | rmmod cyblafb | ||
170 | modprobe cyblafb | ||
171 | con2fb /dev/fb1 /dev/tty1 | ||
172 | ... | ||
173 | |||
174 | Of course, you might choose another mode, and most certainly you also want to | ||
175 | map some other /dev/tty* to the real framebuffer device. You might also choose | ||
176 | to compile fbcon as a kernel module or place it permanently in the kernel. | ||
177 | |||
178 | I do not know of any way to unload fbcon, and fbcon will prevent the | ||
179 | framebuffer device loaded first from unloading. [If there is a way, then | ||
180 | please add a description here!] | ||
181 | |||
182 | Module unloading, the vesafb method | ||
183 | =================================== | ||
184 | |||
185 | Configure the kernel: | ||
186 | |||
187 | <*> Support for frame buffer devices | ||
188 | [*] VESA VGA graphics support | ||
189 | <M> Cyberblade/i1 support | ||
190 | |||
191 | Add e.g. "video=vesafb:ypan vga=0x307" to the kernel parameters. The ypan | ||
192 | parameter is important, choose any vga parameter you like as long as it is | ||
193 | a graphics mode. | ||
194 | |||
195 | After booting, load cyblafb without any mode and bpp parameter and assign | ||
196 | cyblafb to individual ttys using con2fb, e.g.: | ||
197 | |||
198 | modprobe cyblafb vesafb=1 | ||
199 | con2fb /dev/fb1 /dev/tty1 | ||
200 | |||
201 | Unloading cyblafb works without problems after you assign vesafb to all | ||
202 | ttys again, e.g.: | ||
203 | |||
204 | con2fb /dev/fb0 /dev/tty1 | ||
205 | rmmod cyblafb | ||
206 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/whycyblafb b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/whycyblafb new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a123bc11e698 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/cyblafb/whycyblafb | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ | |||
1 | I tried the following framebuffer drivers: | ||
2 | |||
3 | - TRIDENTFB is full of bugs. Acceleration is broken for Blade3D | ||
4 | graphics cores like the cyberblade/i1. It claims to support a great | ||
5 | number of devices, but documentation for most of these devices is | ||
6 | unfortunately not available. There is _no_ reason to use tridentfb | ||
7 | for cyberblade/i1 + CRT users. VESAFB is faster, and the one | ||
8 | advantage, mode switching, is broken in tridentfb. | ||
9 | |||
10 | - VESAFB is used by many distributions as a standard. Vesafb does | ||
11 | not support mode switching. VESAFB is a bit faster than the working | ||
12 | configurations of TRIDENTFB, but it is still too slow, even if you | ||
13 | use ypan. | ||
14 | |||
15 | - EPIAFB (you'll find it on sourceforge) supports the Cyberblade/i1 | ||
16 | graphics core, but it still has serious bugs and developement seems | ||
17 | to have stopped. This is the one driver with TV-out support. If you | ||
18 | do need this feature, try epiafb. | ||
19 | |||
20 | None of these drivers was a real option for me. | ||
21 | |||
22 | I believe that is unreasonable to change code that announces to support 20 | ||
23 | devices if I only have more or less sufficient documentation for exactly one | ||
24 | of these. The risk of breaking device foo while fixing device bar is too high. | ||
25 | |||
26 | So I decided to start CyBlaFB as a stripped down tridentfb. | ||
27 | |||
28 | All code specific to other Trident chips has been removed. After that there | ||
29 | were a lot of cosmetic changes to increase the readability of the code. All | ||
30 | register names were changed to those mnemonics used in the datasheet. Function | ||
31 | and macro names were changed if they hindered easy understanding of the code. | ||
32 | |||
33 | After that I debugged the code and implemented some new features. I'll try to | ||
34 | give a little summary of the main changes: | ||
35 | |||
36 | - calculation of vertical and horizontal timings was fixed | ||
37 | |||
38 | - video signal quality has been improved dramatically | ||
39 | |||
40 | - acceleration: | ||
41 | |||
42 | - fillrect and copyarea were fixed and reenabled | ||
43 | |||
44 | - color expanding imageblit was newly implemented, color | ||
45 | imageblit (only used to draw the penguine) still uses the | ||
46 | generic code. | ||
47 | |||
48 | - init of the acceleration engine was improved and moved to a | ||
49 | place where it really works ... | ||
50 | |||
51 | - sync function has a timeout now and tries to reset and | ||
52 | reinit the accel engine if necessary | ||
53 | |||
54 | - fewer slow copyarea calls when doing ypan scrolling by using | ||
55 | undocumented bit d21 of screen start address stored in | ||
56 | CR2B[5]. BIOS does use it also, so this should be safe. | ||
57 | |||
58 | - cyblafb rejects any attempt to set modes that would cause vclk | ||
59 | values above reasonable 230 MHz. 32bit modes use a clock | ||
60 | multiplicator of 2, so fbset does show the correct values for | ||
61 | pixclock but not for vclk in this case. The fbset limit is 115 MHz | ||
62 | for 32 bpp modes. | ||
63 | |||
64 | - cyblafb rejects modes known to be broken or unimplemented (all | ||
65 | interlaced modes, all doublescan modes for now) | ||
66 | |||
67 | - cyblafb now works independant of the video mode in effect at startup | ||
68 | time (tridentfb does not init all needed registers to reasonable | ||
69 | values) | ||
70 | |||
71 | - switching between video modes does work reliably now | ||
72 | |||
73 | - the first video mode now is the one selected on startup using the | ||
74 | vga=???? mechanism or any of | ||
75 | - 640x480, 800x600, 1024x768, 1280x1024 | ||
76 | - 8, 16, 24 or 32 bpp | ||
77 | - refresh between 50 Hz and 85 Hz, 1 Hz steps (1280x1024-32 | ||
78 | is limited to 63Hz) | ||
79 | |||
80 | - pci retry and pci burst mode are settable (try to disable if you | ||
81 | experience latency problems) | ||
82 | |||
83 | - built as a module cyblafb might be unloaded and reloaded using | ||
84 | the vfb module and con2vt or might be used together with vesafb | ||
85 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/modedb.txt b/Documentation/fb/modedb.txt index e04458b319d5..4fcdb4cf4cca 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/modedb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/modedb.txt | |||
@@ -20,12 +20,83 @@ in a video= option, fbmem considers that to be a global video mode option. | |||
20 | 20 | ||
21 | Valid mode specifiers (mode_option argument): | 21 | Valid mode specifiers (mode_option argument): |
22 | 22 | ||
23 | <xres>x<yres>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>] | 23 | <xres>x<yres>[M][R][-<bpp>][@<refresh>][i][m] |
24 | <name>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>] | 24 | <name>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>] |
25 | 25 | ||
26 | with <xres>, <yres>, <bpp> and <refresh> decimal numbers and <name> a string. | 26 | with <xres>, <yres>, <bpp> and <refresh> decimal numbers and <name> a string. |
27 | Things between square brackets are optional. | 27 | Things between square brackets are optional. |
28 | 28 | ||
29 | If 'M' is specified in the mode_option argument (after <yres> and before | ||
30 | <bpp> and <refresh>, if specified) the timings will be calculated using | ||
31 | VESA(TM) Coordinated Video Timings instead of looking up the mode from a table. | ||
32 | If 'R' is specified, do a 'reduced blanking' calculation for digital displays. | ||
33 | If 'i' is specified, calculate for an interlaced mode. And if 'm' is | ||
34 | specified, add margins to the calculation (1.8% of xres rounded down to 8 | ||
35 | pixels and 1.8% of yres). | ||
36 | |||
37 | Sample usage: 1024x768M@60m - CVT timing with margins | ||
38 | |||
39 | ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** | ||
40 | |||
41 | What is the VESA(TM) Coordinated Video Timings (CVT)? | ||
42 | |||
43 | From the VESA(TM) Website: | ||
44 | |||
45 | "The purpose of CVT is to provide a method for generating a consistent | ||
46 | and coordinated set of standard formats, display refresh rates, and | ||
47 | timing specifications for computer display products, both those | ||
48 | employing CRTs, and those using other display technologies. The | ||
49 | intention of CVT is to give both source and display manufacturers a | ||
50 | common set of tools to enable new timings to be developed in a | ||
51 | consistent manner that ensures greater compatibility." | ||
52 | |||
53 | This is the third standard approved by VESA(TM) concerning video timings. The | ||
54 | first was the Discrete Video Timings (DVT) which is a collection of | ||
55 | pre-defined modes approved by VESA(TM). The second is the Generalized Timing | ||
56 | Formula (GTF) which is an algorithm to calculate the timings, given the | ||
57 | pixelclock, the horizontal sync frequency, or the vertical refresh rate. | ||
58 | |||
59 | The GTF is limited by the fact that it is designed mainly for CRT displays. | ||
60 | It artificially increases the pixelclock because of its high blanking | ||
61 | requirement. This is inappropriate for digital display interface with its high | ||
62 | data rate which requires that it conserves the pixelclock as much as possible. | ||
63 | Also, GTF does not take into account the aspect ratio of the display. | ||
64 | |||
65 | The CVT addresses these limitations. If used with CRT's, the formula used | ||
66 | is a derivation of GTF with a few modifications. If used with digital | ||
67 | displays, the "reduced blanking" calculation can be used. | ||
68 | |||
69 | From the framebuffer subsystem perspective, new formats need not be added | ||
70 | to the global mode database whenever a new mode is released by display | ||
71 | manufacturers. Specifying for CVT will work for most, if not all, relatively | ||
72 | new CRT displays and probably with most flatpanels, if 'reduced blanking' | ||
73 | calculation is specified. (The CVT compatibility of the display can be | ||
74 | determined from its EDID. The version 1.3 of the EDID has extra 128-byte | ||
75 | blocks where additional timing information is placed. As of this time, there | ||
76 | is no support yet in the layer to parse this additional blocks.) | ||
77 | |||
78 | CVT also introduced a new naming convention (should be seen from dmesg output): | ||
79 | |||
80 | <pix>M<a>[-R] | ||
81 | |||
82 | where: pix = total amount of pixels in MB (xres x yres) | ||
83 | M = always present | ||
84 | a = aspect ratio (3 - 4:3; 4 - 5:4; 9 - 15:9, 16:9; A - 16:10) | ||
85 | -R = reduced blanking | ||
86 | |||
87 | example: .48M3-R - 800x600 with reduced blanking | ||
88 | |||
89 | Note: VESA(TM) has restrictions on what is a standard CVT timing: | ||
90 | |||
91 | - aspect ratio can only be one of the above values | ||
92 | - acceptable refresh rates are 50, 60, 70 or 85 Hz only | ||
93 | - if reduced blanking, the refresh rate must be at 60Hz | ||
94 | |||
95 | If one of the above are not satisfied, the kernel will print a warning but the | ||
96 | timings will still be calculated. | ||
97 | |||
98 | ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** | ||
99 | |||
29 | To find a suitable video mode, you just call | 100 | To find a suitable video mode, you just call |
30 | 101 | ||
31 | int __init fb_find_mode(struct fb_var_screeninfo *var, | 102 | int __init fb_find_mode(struct fb_var_screeninfo *var, |
diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 0665cb12bd66..5f95d4b3cab1 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | |||
@@ -25,15 +25,6 @@ Who: Pavel Machek <pavel@suse.cz> | |||
25 | 25 | ||
26 | --------------------------- | 26 | --------------------------- |
27 | 27 | ||
28 | What: PCI Name Database (CONFIG_PCI_NAMES) | ||
29 | When: July 2005 | ||
30 | Why: It bloats the kernel unnecessarily, and is handled by userspace better | ||
31 | (pciutils supports it.) Will eliminate the need to try to keep the | ||
32 | pci.ids file in sync with the sf.net database all of the time. | ||
33 | Who: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de> | ||
34 | |||
35 | --------------------------- | ||
36 | |||
37 | What: io_remap_page_range() (macro or function) | 28 | What: io_remap_page_range() (macro or function) |
38 | When: September 2005 | 29 | When: September 2005 |
39 | Why: Replaced by io_remap_pfn_range() which allows more memory space | 30 | Why: Replaced by io_remap_pfn_range() which allows more memory space |
@@ -51,14 +42,6 @@ Who: Adrian Bunk <bunk@stusta.de> | |||
51 | 42 | ||
52 | --------------------------- | 43 | --------------------------- |
53 | 44 | ||
54 | What: register_ioctl32_conversion() / unregister_ioctl32_conversion() | ||
55 | When: April 2005 | ||
56 | Why: Replaced by ->compat_ioctl in file_operations and other method | ||
57 | vecors. | ||
58 | Who: Andi Kleen <ak@muc.de>, Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de> | ||
59 | |||
60 | --------------------------- | ||
61 | |||
62 | What: RCU API moves to EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL | 45 | What: RCU API moves to EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL |
63 | When: April 2006 | 46 | When: April 2006 |
64 | Files: include/linux/rcupdate.h, kernel/rcupdate.c | 47 | Files: include/linux/rcupdate.h, kernel/rcupdate.c |
@@ -74,14 +57,6 @@ Who: Paul E. McKenney <paulmck@us.ibm.com> | |||
74 | 57 | ||
75 | --------------------------- | 58 | --------------------------- |
76 | 59 | ||
77 | What: remove verify_area() | ||
78 | When: July 2006 | ||
79 | Files: Various uaccess.h headers. | ||
80 | Why: Deprecated and redundant. access_ok() should be used instead. | ||
81 | Who: Jesper Juhl <juhl-lkml@dif.dk> | ||
82 | |||
83 | --------------------------- | ||
84 | |||
85 | What: IEEE1394 Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol driver, | 60 | What: IEEE1394 Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol driver, |
86 | Connection Management Procedures driver | 61 | Connection Management Procedures driver |
87 | When: November 2005 | 62 | When: November 2005 |
@@ -102,16 +77,6 @@ Who: Jody McIntyre <scjody@steamballoon.com> | |||
102 | 77 | ||
103 | --------------------------- | 78 | --------------------------- |
104 | 79 | ||
105 | What: register_serial/unregister_serial | ||
106 | When: September 2005 | ||
107 | Why: This interface does not allow serial ports to be registered against | ||
108 | a struct device, and as such does not allow correct power management | ||
109 | of such ports. 8250-based ports should use serial8250_register_port | ||
110 | and serial8250_unregister_port, or platform devices instead. | ||
111 | Who: Russell King <rmk@arm.linux.org.uk> | ||
112 | |||
113 | --------------------------- | ||
114 | |||
115 | What: i2c sysfs name change: in1_ref, vid deprecated in favour of cpu0_vid | 80 | What: i2c sysfs name change: in1_ref, vid deprecated in favour of cpu0_vid |
116 | When: November 2005 | 81 | When: November 2005 |
117 | Files: drivers/i2c/chips/adm1025.c, drivers/i2c/chips/adm1026.c | 82 | Files: drivers/i2c/chips/adm1025.c, drivers/i2c/chips/adm1026.c |
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8c206f4e0250 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ | |||
1 | File management in the Linux kernel | ||
2 | ----------------------------------- | ||
3 | |||
4 | This document describes how locking for files (struct file) | ||
5 | and file descriptor table (struct files) works. | ||
6 | |||
7 | Up until 2.6.12, the file descriptor table has been protected | ||
8 | with a lock (files->file_lock) and reference count (files->count). | ||
9 | ->file_lock protected accesses to all the file related fields | ||
10 | of the table. ->count was used for sharing the file descriptor | ||
11 | table between tasks cloned with CLONE_FILES flag. Typically | ||
12 | this would be the case for posix threads. As with the common | ||
13 | refcounting model in the kernel, the last task doing | ||
14 | a put_files_struct() frees the file descriptor (fd) table. | ||
15 | The files (struct file) themselves are protected using | ||
16 | reference count (->f_count). | ||
17 | |||
18 | In the new lock-free model of file descriptor management, | ||
19 | the reference counting is similar, but the locking is | ||
20 | based on RCU. The file descriptor table contains multiple | ||
21 | elements - the fd sets (open_fds and close_on_exec, the | ||
22 | array of file pointers, the sizes of the sets and the array | ||
23 | etc.). In order for the updates to appear atomic to | ||
24 | a lock-free reader, all the elements of the file descriptor | ||
25 | table are in a separate structure - struct fdtable. | ||
26 | files_struct contains a pointer to struct fdtable through | ||
27 | which the actual fd table is accessed. Initially the | ||
28 | fdtable is embedded in files_struct itself. On a subsequent | ||
29 | expansion of fdtable, a new fdtable structure is allocated | ||
30 | and files->fdtab points to the new structure. The fdtable | ||
31 | structure is freed with RCU and lock-free readers either | ||
32 | see the old fdtable or the new fdtable making the update | ||
33 | appear atomic. Here are the locking rules for | ||
34 | the fdtable structure - | ||
35 | |||
36 | 1. All references to the fdtable must be done through | ||
37 | the files_fdtable() macro : | ||
38 | |||
39 | struct fdtable *fdt; | ||
40 | |||
41 | rcu_read_lock(); | ||
42 | |||
43 | fdt = files_fdtable(files); | ||
44 | .... | ||
45 | if (n <= fdt->max_fds) | ||
46 | .... | ||
47 | ... | ||
48 | rcu_read_unlock(); | ||
49 | |||
50 | files_fdtable() uses rcu_dereference() macro which takes care of | ||
51 | the memory barrier requirements for lock-free dereference. | ||
52 | The fdtable pointer must be read within the read-side | ||
53 | critical section. | ||
54 | |||
55 | 2. Reading of the fdtable as described above must be protected | ||
56 | by rcu_read_lock()/rcu_read_unlock(). | ||
57 | |||
58 | 3. For any update to the the fd table, files->file_lock must | ||
59 | be held. | ||
60 | |||
61 | 4. To look up the file structure given an fd, a reader | ||
62 | must use either fcheck() or fcheck_files() APIs. These | ||
63 | take care of barrier requirements due to lock-free lookup. | ||
64 | An example : | ||
65 | |||
66 | struct file *file; | ||
67 | |||
68 | rcu_read_lock(); | ||
69 | file = fcheck(fd); | ||
70 | if (file) { | ||
71 | ... | ||
72 | } | ||
73 | .... | ||
74 | rcu_read_unlock(); | ||
75 | |||
76 | 5. Handling of the file structures is special. Since the look-up | ||
77 | of the fd (fget()/fget_light()) are lock-free, it is possible | ||
78 | that look-up may race with the last put() operation on the | ||
79 | file structure. This is avoided using the rcuref APIs | ||
80 | on ->f_count : | ||
81 | |||
82 | rcu_read_lock(); | ||
83 | file = fcheck_files(files, fd); | ||
84 | if (file) { | ||
85 | if (rcuref_inc_lf(&file->f_count)) | ||
86 | *fput_needed = 1; | ||
87 | else | ||
88 | /* Didn't get the reference, someone's freed */ | ||
89 | file = NULL; | ||
90 | } | ||
91 | rcu_read_unlock(); | ||
92 | .... | ||
93 | return file; | ||
94 | |||
95 | rcuref_inc_lf() detects if refcounts is already zero or | ||
96 | goes to zero during increment. If it does, we fail | ||
97 | fget()/fget_light(). | ||
98 | |||
99 | 6. Since both fdtable and file structures can be looked up | ||
100 | lock-free, they must be installed using rcu_assign_pointer() | ||
101 | API. If they are looked up lock-free, rcu_dereference() | ||
102 | must be used. However it is advisable to use files_fdtable() | ||
103 | and fcheck()/fcheck_files() which take care of these issues. | ||
104 | |||
105 | 7. While updating, the fdtable pointer must be looked up while | ||
106 | holding files->file_lock. If ->file_lock is dropped, then | ||
107 | another thread expand the files thereby creating a new | ||
108 | fdtable and making the earlier fdtable pointer stale. | ||
109 | For example : | ||
110 | |||
111 | spin_lock(&files->file_lock); | ||
112 | fd = locate_fd(files, file, start); | ||
113 | if (fd >= 0) { | ||
114 | /* locate_fd() may have expanded fdtable, load the ptr */ | ||
115 | fdt = files_fdtable(files); | ||
116 | FD_SET(fd, fdt->open_fds); | ||
117 | FD_CLR(fd, fdt->close_on_exec); | ||
118 | spin_unlock(&files->file_lock); | ||
119 | ..... | ||
120 | |||
121 | Since locate_fd() can drop ->file_lock (and reacquire ->file_lock), | ||
122 | the fdtable pointer (fdt) must be loaded after locate_fd(). | ||
123 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fuse.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/fuse.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6b5741e651a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fuse.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,315 @@ | |||
1 | Definitions | ||
2 | ~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
3 | |||
4 | Userspace filesystem: | ||
5 | |||
6 | A filesystem in which data and metadata are provided by an ordinary | ||
7 | userspace process. The filesystem can be accessed normally through | ||
8 | the kernel interface. | ||
9 | |||
10 | Filesystem daemon: | ||
11 | |||
12 | The process(es) providing the data and metadata of the filesystem. | ||
13 | |||
14 | Non-privileged mount (or user mount): | ||
15 | |||
16 | A userspace filesystem mounted by a non-privileged (non-root) user. | ||
17 | The filesystem daemon is running with the privileges of the mounting | ||
18 | user. NOTE: this is not the same as mounts allowed with the "user" | ||
19 | option in /etc/fstab, which is not discussed here. | ||
20 | |||
21 | Mount owner: | ||
22 | |||
23 | The user who does the mounting. | ||
24 | |||
25 | User: | ||
26 | |||
27 | The user who is performing filesystem operations. | ||
28 | |||
29 | What is FUSE? | ||
30 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
31 | |||
32 | FUSE is a userspace filesystem framework. It consists of a kernel | ||
33 | module (fuse.ko), a userspace library (libfuse.*) and a mount utility | ||
34 | (fusermount). | ||
35 | |||
36 | One of the most important features of FUSE is allowing secure, | ||
37 | non-privileged mounts. This opens up new possibilities for the use of | ||
38 | filesystems. A good example is sshfs: a secure network filesystem | ||
39 | using the sftp protocol. | ||
40 | |||
41 | The userspace library and utilities are available from the FUSE | ||
42 | homepage: | ||
43 | |||
44 | http://fuse.sourceforge.net/ | ||
45 | |||
46 | Mount options | ||
47 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
48 | |||
49 | 'fd=N' | ||
50 | |||
51 | The file descriptor to use for communication between the userspace | ||
52 | filesystem and the kernel. The file descriptor must have been | ||
53 | obtained by opening the FUSE device ('/dev/fuse'). | ||
54 | |||
55 | 'rootmode=M' | ||
56 | |||
57 | The file mode of the filesystem's root in octal representation. | ||
58 | |||
59 | 'user_id=N' | ||
60 | |||
61 | The numeric user id of the mount owner. | ||
62 | |||
63 | 'group_id=N' | ||
64 | |||
65 | The numeric group id of the mount owner. | ||
66 | |||
67 | 'default_permissions' | ||
68 | |||
69 | By default FUSE doesn't check file access permissions, the | ||
70 | filesystem is free to implement it's access policy or leave it to | ||
71 | the underlying file access mechanism (e.g. in case of network | ||
72 | filesystems). This option enables permission checking, restricting | ||
73 | access based on file mode. This is option is usually useful | ||
74 | together with the 'allow_other' mount option. | ||
75 | |||
76 | 'allow_other' | ||
77 | |||
78 | This option overrides the security measure restricting file access | ||
79 | to the user mounting the filesystem. This option is by default only | ||
80 | allowed to root, but this restriction can be removed with a | ||
81 | (userspace) configuration option. | ||
82 | |||
83 | 'max_read=N' | ||
84 | |||
85 | With this option the maximum size of read operations can be set. | ||
86 | The default is infinite. Note that the size of read requests is | ||
87 | limited anyway to 32 pages (which is 128kbyte on i386). | ||
88 | |||
89 | How do non-privileged mounts work? | ||
90 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
91 | |||
92 | Since the mount() system call is a privileged operation, a helper | ||
93 | program (fusermount) is needed, which is installed setuid root. | ||
94 | |||
95 | The implication of providing non-privileged mounts is that the mount | ||
96 | owner must not be able to use this capability to compromise the | ||
97 | system. Obvious requirements arising from this are: | ||
98 | |||
99 | A) mount owner should not be able to get elevated privileges with the | ||
100 | help of the mounted filesystem | ||
101 | |||
102 | B) mount owner should not get illegitimate access to information from | ||
103 | other users' and the super user's processes | ||
104 | |||
105 | C) mount owner should not be able to induce undesired behavior in | ||
106 | other users' or the super user's processes | ||
107 | |||
108 | How are requirements fulfilled? | ||
109 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
110 | |||
111 | A) The mount owner could gain elevated privileges by either: | ||
112 | |||
113 | 1) creating a filesystem containing a device file, then opening | ||
114 | this device | ||
115 | |||
116 | 2) creating a filesystem containing a suid or sgid application, | ||
117 | then executing this application | ||
118 | |||
119 | The solution is not to allow opening device files and ignore | ||
120 | setuid and setgid bits when executing programs. To ensure this | ||
121 | fusermount always adds "nosuid" and "nodev" to the mount options | ||
122 | for non-privileged mounts. | ||
123 | |||
124 | B) If another user is accessing files or directories in the | ||
125 | filesystem, the filesystem daemon serving requests can record the | ||
126 | exact sequence and timing of operations performed. This | ||
127 | information is otherwise inaccessible to the mount owner, so this | ||
128 | counts as an information leak. | ||
129 | |||
130 | The solution to this problem will be presented in point 2) of C). | ||
131 | |||
132 | C) There are several ways in which the mount owner can induce | ||
133 | undesired behavior in other users' processes, such as: | ||
134 | |||
135 | 1) mounting a filesystem over a file or directory which the mount | ||
136 | owner could otherwise not be able to modify (or could only | ||
137 | make limited modifications). | ||
138 | |||
139 | This is solved in fusermount, by checking the access | ||
140 | permissions on the mountpoint and only allowing the mount if | ||
141 | the mount owner can do unlimited modification (has write | ||
142 | access to the mountpoint, and mountpoint is not a "sticky" | ||
143 | directory) | ||
144 | |||
145 | 2) Even if 1) is solved the mount owner can change the behavior | ||
146 | of other users' processes. | ||
147 | |||
148 | i) It can slow down or indefinitely delay the execution of a | ||
149 | filesystem operation creating a DoS against the user or the | ||
150 | whole system. For example a suid application locking a | ||
151 | system file, and then accessing a file on the mount owner's | ||
152 | filesystem could be stopped, and thus causing the system | ||
153 | file to be locked forever. | ||
154 | |||
155 | ii) It can present files or directories of unlimited length, or | ||
156 | directory structures of unlimited depth, possibly causing a | ||
157 | system process to eat up diskspace, memory or other | ||
158 | resources, again causing DoS. | ||
159 | |||
160 | The solution to this as well as B) is not to allow processes | ||
161 | to access the filesystem, which could otherwise not be | ||
162 | monitored or manipulated by the mount owner. Since if the | ||
163 | mount owner can ptrace a process, it can do all of the above | ||
164 | without using a FUSE mount, the same criteria as used in | ||
165 | ptrace can be used to check if a process is allowed to access | ||
166 | the filesystem or not. | ||
167 | |||
168 | Note that the ptrace check is not strictly necessary to | ||
169 | prevent B/2/i, it is enough to check if mount owner has enough | ||
170 | privilege to send signal to the process accessing the | ||
171 | filesystem, since SIGSTOP can be used to get a similar effect. | ||
172 | |||
173 | I think these limitations are unacceptable? | ||
174 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
175 | |||
176 | If a sysadmin trusts the users enough, or can ensure through other | ||
177 | measures, that system processes will never enter non-privileged | ||
178 | mounts, it can relax the last limitation with a "user_allow_other" | ||
179 | config option. If this config option is set, the mounting user can | ||
180 | add the "allow_other" mount option which disables the check for other | ||
181 | users' processes. | ||
182 | |||
183 | Kernel - userspace interface | ||
184 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
185 | |||
186 | The following diagram shows how a filesystem operation (in this | ||
187 | example unlink) is performed in FUSE. | ||
188 | |||
189 | NOTE: everything in this description is greatly simplified | ||
190 | |||
191 | | "rm /mnt/fuse/file" | FUSE filesystem daemon | ||
192 | | | | ||
193 | | | >sys_read() | ||
194 | | | >fuse_dev_read() | ||
195 | | | >request_wait() | ||
196 | | | [sleep on fc->waitq] | ||
197 | | | | ||
198 | | >sys_unlink() | | ||
199 | | >fuse_unlink() | | ||
200 | | [get request from | | ||
201 | | fc->unused_list] | | ||
202 | | >request_send() | | ||
203 | | [queue req on fc->pending] | | ||
204 | | [wake up fc->waitq] | [woken up] | ||
205 | | >request_wait_answer() | | ||
206 | | [sleep on req->waitq] | | ||
207 | | | <request_wait() | ||
208 | | | [remove req from fc->pending] | ||
209 | | | [copy req to read buffer] | ||
210 | | | [add req to fc->processing] | ||
211 | | | <fuse_dev_read() | ||
212 | | | <sys_read() | ||
213 | | | | ||
214 | | | [perform unlink] | ||
215 | | | | ||
216 | | | >sys_write() | ||
217 | | | >fuse_dev_write() | ||
218 | | | [look up req in fc->processing] | ||
219 | | | [remove from fc->processing] | ||
220 | | | [copy write buffer to req] | ||
221 | | [woken up] | [wake up req->waitq] | ||
222 | | | <fuse_dev_write() | ||
223 | | | <sys_write() | ||
224 | | <request_wait_answer() | | ||
225 | | <request_send() | | ||
226 | | [add request to | | ||
227 | | fc->unused_list] | | ||
228 | | <fuse_unlink() | | ||
229 | | <sys_unlink() | | ||
230 | |||
231 | There are a couple of ways in which to deadlock a FUSE filesystem. | ||
232 | Since we are talking about unprivileged userspace programs, | ||
233 | something must be done about these. | ||
234 | |||
235 | Scenario 1 - Simple deadlock | ||
236 | ----------------------------- | ||
237 | |||
238 | | "rm /mnt/fuse/file" | FUSE filesystem daemon | ||
239 | | | | ||
240 | | >sys_unlink("/mnt/fuse/file") | | ||
241 | | [acquire inode semaphore | | ||
242 | | for "file"] | | ||
243 | | >fuse_unlink() | | ||
244 | | [sleep on req->waitq] | | ||
245 | | | <sys_read() | ||
246 | | | >sys_unlink("/mnt/fuse/file") | ||
247 | | | [acquire inode semaphore | ||
248 | | | for "file"] | ||
249 | | | *DEADLOCK* | ||
250 | |||
251 | The solution for this is to allow requests to be interrupted while | ||
252 | they are in userspace: | ||
253 | |||
254 | | [interrupted by signal] | | ||
255 | | <fuse_unlink() | | ||
256 | | [release semaphore] | [semaphore acquired] | ||
257 | | <sys_unlink() | | ||
258 | | | >fuse_unlink() | ||
259 | | | [queue req on fc->pending] | ||
260 | | | [wake up fc->waitq] | ||
261 | | | [sleep on req->waitq] | ||
262 | |||
263 | If the filesystem daemon was single threaded, this will stop here, | ||
264 | since there's no other thread to dequeue and execute the request. | ||
265 | In this case the solution is to kill the FUSE daemon as well. If | ||
266 | there are multiple serving threads, you just have to kill them as | ||
267 | long as any remain. | ||
268 | |||
269 | Moral: a filesystem which deadlocks, can soon find itself dead. | ||
270 | |||
271 | Scenario 2 - Tricky deadlock | ||
272 | ---------------------------- | ||
273 | |||
274 | This one needs a carefully crafted filesystem. It's a variation on | ||
275 | the above, only the call back to the filesystem is not explicit, | ||
276 | but is caused by a pagefault. | ||
277 | |||
278 | | Kamikaze filesystem thread 1 | Kamikaze filesystem thread 2 | ||
279 | | | | ||
280 | | [fd = open("/mnt/fuse/file")] | [request served normally] | ||
281 | | [mmap fd to 'addr'] | | ||
282 | | [close fd] | [FLUSH triggers 'magic' flag] | ||
283 | | [read a byte from addr] | | ||
284 | | >do_page_fault() | | ||
285 | | [find or create page] | | ||
286 | | [lock page] | | ||
287 | | >fuse_readpage() | | ||
288 | | [queue READ request] | | ||
289 | | [sleep on req->waitq] | | ||
290 | | | [read request to buffer] | ||
291 | | | [create reply header before addr] | ||
292 | | | >sys_write(addr - headerlength) | ||
293 | | | >fuse_dev_write() | ||
294 | | | [look up req in fc->processing] | ||
295 | | | [remove from fc->processing] | ||
296 | | | [copy write buffer to req] | ||
297 | | | >do_page_fault() | ||
298 | | | [find or create page] | ||
299 | | | [lock page] | ||
300 | | | * DEADLOCK * | ||
301 | |||
302 | Solution is again to let the the request be interrupted (not | ||
303 | elaborated further). | ||
304 | |||
305 | An additional problem is that while the write buffer is being | ||
306 | copied to the request, the request must not be interrupted. This | ||
307 | is because the destination address of the copy may not be valid | ||
308 | after the request is interrupted. | ||
309 | |||
310 | This is solved with doing the copy atomically, and allowing | ||
311 | interruption while the page(s) belonging to the write buffer are | ||
312 | faulted with get_user_pages(). The 'req->locked' flag indicates | ||
313 | when the copy is taking place, and interruption is delayed until | ||
314 | this flag is unset. | ||
315 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt index eef4aca0c753..a5fbc8e897fa 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt | |||
@@ -439,6 +439,18 @@ ChangeLog | |||
439 | 439 | ||
440 | Note, a technical ChangeLog aimed at kernel hackers is in fs/ntfs/ChangeLog. | 440 | Note, a technical ChangeLog aimed at kernel hackers is in fs/ntfs/ChangeLog. |
441 | 441 | ||
442 | 2.1.24: | ||
443 | - Support journals ($LogFile) which have been modified by chkdsk. This | ||
444 | means users can boot into Windows after we marked the volume dirty. | ||
445 | The Windows boot will run chkdsk and then reboot. The user can then | ||
446 | immediately boot into Linux rather than having to do a full Windows | ||
447 | boot first before rebooting into Linux and we will recognize such a | ||
448 | journal and empty it as it is clean by definition. | ||
449 | - Support journals ($LogFile) with only one restart page as well as | ||
450 | journals with two different restart pages. We sanity check both and | ||
451 | either use the only sane one or the more recent one of the two in the | ||
452 | case that both are valid. | ||
453 | - Lots of bug fixes and enhancements across the board. | ||
442 | 2.1.23: | 454 | 2.1.23: |
443 | - Stamp the user space journal, aka transaction log, aka $UsnJrnl, if | 455 | - Stamp the user space journal, aka transaction log, aka $UsnJrnl, if |
444 | it is present and active thus telling Windows and applications using | 456 | it is present and active thus telling Windows and applications using |
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index 6c98f2bd421e..d4773565ea2f 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | |||
@@ -133,6 +133,7 @@ Table 1-1: Process specific entries in /proc | |||
133 | statm Process memory status information | 133 | statm Process memory status information |
134 | status Process status in human readable form | 134 | status Process status in human readable form |
135 | wchan If CONFIG_KALLSYMS is set, a pre-decoded wchan | 135 | wchan If CONFIG_KALLSYMS is set, a pre-decoded wchan |
136 | smaps Extension based on maps, presenting the rss size for each mapped file | ||
136 | .............................................................................. | 137 | .............................................................................. |
137 | 138 | ||
138 | For example, to get the status information of a process, all you have to do is | 139 | For example, to get the status information of a process, all you have to do is |
@@ -1240,16 +1241,38 @@ swap-intensive. | |||
1240 | overcommit_memory | 1241 | overcommit_memory |
1241 | ----------------- | 1242 | ----------------- |
1242 | 1243 | ||
1243 | This file contains one value. The following algorithm is used to decide if | 1244 | Controls overcommit of system memory, possibly allowing processes |
1244 | there's enough memory: if the value of overcommit_memory is positive, then | 1245 | to allocate (but not use) more memory than is actually available. |
1245 | there's always enough memory. This is a useful feature, since programs often | ||
1246 | malloc() huge amounts of memory 'just in case', while they only use a small | ||
1247 | part of it. Leaving this value at 0 will lead to the failure of such a huge | ||
1248 | malloc(), when in fact the system has enough memory for the program to run. | ||
1249 | 1246 | ||
1250 | On the other hand, enabling this feature can cause you to run out of memory | 1247 | |
1251 | and thrash the system to death, so large and/or important servers will want to | 1248 | 0 - Heuristic overcommit handling. Obvious overcommits of |
1252 | set this value to 0. | 1249 | address space are refused. Used for a typical system. It |
1250 | ensures a seriously wild allocation fails while allowing | ||
1251 | overcommit to reduce swap usage. root is allowed to | ||
1252 | allocate slighly more memory in this mode. This is the | ||
1253 | default. | ||
1254 | |||
1255 | 1 - Always overcommit. Appropriate for some scientific | ||
1256 | applications. | ||
1257 | |||
1258 | 2 - Don't overcommit. The total address space commit | ||
1259 | for the system is not permitted to exceed swap plus a | ||
1260 | configurable percentage (default is 50) of physical RAM. | ||
1261 | Depending on the percentage you use, in most situations | ||
1262 | this means a process will not be killed while attempting | ||
1263 | to use already-allocated memory but will receive errors | ||
1264 | on memory allocation as appropriate. | ||
1265 | |||
1266 | overcommit_ratio | ||
1267 | ---------------- | ||
1268 | |||
1269 | Percentage of physical memory size to include in overcommit calculations | ||
1270 | (see above.) | ||
1271 | |||
1272 | Memory allocation limit = swapspace + physmem * (overcommit_ratio / 100) | ||
1273 | |||
1274 | swapspace = total size of all swap areas | ||
1275 | physmem = size of physical memory in system | ||
1253 | 1276 | ||
1254 | nr_hugepages and hugetlb_shm_group | 1277 | nr_hugepages and hugetlb_shm_group |
1255 | ---------------------------------- | 1278 | ---------------------------------- |
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/relayfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/relayfs.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d24e1b0d4f39 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/relayfs.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,362 @@ | |||
1 | |||
2 | relayfs - a high-speed data relay filesystem | ||
3 | ============================================ | ||
4 | |||
5 | relayfs is a filesystem designed to provide an efficient mechanism for | ||
6 | tools and facilities to relay large and potentially sustained streams | ||
7 | of data from kernel space to user space. | ||
8 | |||
9 | The main abstraction of relayfs is the 'channel'. A channel consists | ||
10 | of a set of per-cpu kernel buffers each represented by a file in the | ||
11 | relayfs filesystem. Kernel clients write into a channel using | ||
12 | efficient write functions which automatically log to the current cpu's | ||
13 | channel buffer. User space applications mmap() the per-cpu files and | ||
14 | retrieve the data as it becomes available. | ||
15 | |||
16 | The format of the data logged into the channel buffers is completely | ||
17 | up to the relayfs client; relayfs does however provide hooks which | ||
18 | allow clients to impose some stucture on the buffer data. Nor does | ||
19 | relayfs implement any form of data filtering - this also is left to | ||
20 | the client. The purpose is to keep relayfs as simple as possible. | ||
21 | |||
22 | This document provides an overview of the relayfs API. The details of | ||
23 | the function parameters are documented along with the functions in the | ||
24 | filesystem code - please see that for details. | ||
25 | |||
26 | Semantics | ||
27 | ========= | ||
28 | |||
29 | Each relayfs channel has one buffer per CPU, each buffer has one or | ||
30 | more sub-buffers. Messages are written to the first sub-buffer until | ||
31 | it is too full to contain a new message, in which case it it is | ||
32 | written to the next (if available). Messages are never split across | ||
33 | sub-buffers. At this point, userspace can be notified so it empties | ||
34 | the first sub-buffer, while the kernel continues writing to the next. | ||
35 | |||
36 | When notified that a sub-buffer is full, the kernel knows how many | ||
37 | bytes of it are padding i.e. unused. Userspace can use this knowledge | ||
38 | to copy only valid data. | ||
39 | |||
40 | After copying it, userspace can notify the kernel that a sub-buffer | ||
41 | has been consumed. | ||
42 | |||
43 | relayfs can operate in a mode where it will overwrite data not yet | ||
44 | collected by userspace, and not wait for it to consume it. | ||
45 | |||
46 | relayfs itself does not provide for communication of such data between | ||
47 | userspace and kernel, allowing the kernel side to remain simple and not | ||
48 | impose a single interface on userspace. It does provide a separate | ||
49 | helper though, described below. | ||
50 | |||
51 | klog, relay-app & librelay | ||
52 | ========================== | ||
53 | |||
54 | relayfs itself is ready to use, but to make things easier, two | ||
55 | additional systems are provided. klog is a simple wrapper to make | ||
56 | writing formatted text or raw data to a channel simpler, regardless of | ||
57 | whether a channel to write into exists or not, or whether relayfs is | ||
58 | compiled into the kernel or is configured as a module. relay-app is | ||
59 | the kernel counterpart of userspace librelay.c, combined these two | ||
60 | files provide glue to easily stream data to disk, without having to | ||
61 | bother with housekeeping. klog and relay-app can be used together, | ||
62 | with klog providing high-level logging functions to the kernel and | ||
63 | relay-app taking care of kernel-user control and disk-logging chores. | ||
64 | |||
65 | It is possible to use relayfs without relay-app & librelay, but you'll | ||
66 | have to implement communication between userspace and kernel, allowing | ||
67 | both to convey the state of buffers (full, empty, amount of padding). | ||
68 | |||
69 | klog, relay-app and librelay can be found in the relay-apps tarball on | ||
70 | http://relayfs.sourceforge.net | ||
71 | |||
72 | The relayfs user space API | ||
73 | ========================== | ||
74 | |||
75 | relayfs implements basic file operations for user space access to | ||
76 | relayfs channel buffer data. Here are the file operations that are | ||
77 | available and some comments regarding their behavior: | ||
78 | |||
79 | open() enables user to open an _existing_ buffer. | ||
80 | |||
81 | mmap() results in channel buffer being mapped into the caller's | ||
82 | memory space. Note that you can't do a partial mmap - you must | ||
83 | map the entire file, which is NRBUF * SUBBUFSIZE. | ||
84 | |||
85 | read() read the contents of a channel buffer. The bytes read are | ||
86 | 'consumed' by the reader i.e. they won't be available again | ||
87 | to subsequent reads. If the channel is being used in | ||
88 | no-overwrite mode (the default), it can be read at any time | ||
89 | even if there's an active kernel writer. If the channel is | ||
90 | being used in overwrite mode and there are active channel | ||
91 | writers, results may be unpredictable - users should make | ||
92 | sure that all logging to the channel has ended before using | ||
93 | read() with overwrite mode. | ||
94 | |||
95 | poll() POLLIN/POLLRDNORM/POLLERR supported. User applications are | ||
96 | notified when sub-buffer boundaries are crossed. | ||
97 | |||
98 | close() decrements the channel buffer's refcount. When the refcount | ||
99 | reaches 0 i.e. when no process or kernel client has the buffer | ||
100 | open, the channel buffer is freed. | ||
101 | |||
102 | |||
103 | In order for a user application to make use of relayfs files, the | ||
104 | relayfs filesystem must be mounted. For example, | ||
105 | |||
106 | mount -t relayfs relayfs /mnt/relay | ||
107 | |||
108 | NOTE: relayfs doesn't need to be mounted for kernel clients to create | ||
109 | or use channels - it only needs to be mounted when user space | ||
110 | applications need access to the buffer data. | ||
111 | |||
112 | |||
113 | The relayfs kernel API | ||
114 | ====================== | ||
115 | |||
116 | Here's a summary of the API relayfs provides to in-kernel clients: | ||
117 | |||
118 | |||
119 | channel management functions: | ||
120 | |||
121 | relay_open(base_filename, parent, subbuf_size, n_subbufs, | ||
122 | callbacks) | ||
123 | relay_close(chan) | ||
124 | relay_flush(chan) | ||
125 | relay_reset(chan) | ||
126 | relayfs_create_dir(name, parent) | ||
127 | relayfs_remove_dir(dentry) | ||
128 | |||
129 | channel management typically called on instigation of userspace: | ||
130 | |||
131 | relay_subbufs_consumed(chan, cpu, subbufs_consumed) | ||
132 | |||
133 | write functions: | ||
134 | |||
135 | relay_write(chan, data, length) | ||
136 | __relay_write(chan, data, length) | ||
137 | relay_reserve(chan, length) | ||
138 | |||
139 | callbacks: | ||
140 | |||
141 | subbuf_start(buf, subbuf, prev_subbuf, prev_padding) | ||
142 | buf_mapped(buf, filp) | ||
143 | buf_unmapped(buf, filp) | ||
144 | |||
145 | helper functions: | ||
146 | |||
147 | relay_buf_full(buf) | ||
148 | subbuf_start_reserve(buf, length) | ||
149 | |||
150 | |||
151 | Creating a channel | ||
152 | ------------------ | ||
153 | |||
154 | relay_open() is used to create a channel, along with its per-cpu | ||
155 | channel buffers. Each channel buffer will have an associated file | ||
156 | created for it in the relayfs filesystem, which can be opened and | ||
157 | mmapped from user space if desired. The files are named | ||
158 | basename0...basenameN-1 where N is the number of online cpus, and by | ||
159 | default will be created in the root of the filesystem. If you want a | ||
160 | directory structure to contain your relayfs files, you can create it | ||
161 | with relayfs_create_dir() and pass the parent directory to | ||
162 | relay_open(). Clients are responsible for cleaning up any directory | ||
163 | structure they create when the channel is closed - use | ||
164 | relayfs_remove_dir() for that. | ||
165 | |||
166 | The total size of each per-cpu buffer is calculated by multiplying the | ||
167 | number of sub-buffers by the sub-buffer size passed into relay_open(). | ||
168 | The idea behind sub-buffers is that they're basically an extension of | ||
169 | double-buffering to N buffers, and they also allow applications to | ||
170 | easily implement random-access-on-buffer-boundary schemes, which can | ||
171 | be important for some high-volume applications. The number and size | ||
172 | of sub-buffers is completely dependent on the application and even for | ||
173 | the same application, different conditions will warrant different | ||
174 | values for these parameters at different times. Typically, the right | ||
175 | values to use are best decided after some experimentation; in general, | ||
176 | though, it's safe to assume that having only 1 sub-buffer is a bad | ||
177 | idea - you're guaranteed to either overwrite data or lose events | ||
178 | depending on the channel mode being used. | ||
179 | |||
180 | Channel 'modes' | ||
181 | --------------- | ||
182 | |||
183 | relayfs channels can be used in either of two modes - 'overwrite' or | ||
184 | 'no-overwrite'. The mode is entirely determined by the implementation | ||
185 | of the subbuf_start() callback, as described below. In 'overwrite' | ||
186 | mode, also known as 'flight recorder' mode, writes continuously cycle | ||
187 | around the buffer and will never fail, but will unconditionally | ||
188 | overwrite old data regardless of whether it's actually been consumed. | ||
189 | In no-overwrite mode, writes will fail i.e. data will be lost, if the | ||
190 | number of unconsumed sub-buffers equals the total number of | ||
191 | sub-buffers in the channel. It should be clear that if there is no | ||
192 | consumer or if the consumer can't consume sub-buffers fast enought, | ||
193 | data will be lost in either case; the only difference is whether data | ||
194 | is lost from the beginning or the end of a buffer. | ||
195 | |||
196 | As explained above, a relayfs channel is made of up one or more | ||
197 | per-cpu channel buffers, each implemented as a circular buffer | ||
198 | subdivided into one or more sub-buffers. Messages are written into | ||
199 | the current sub-buffer of the channel's current per-cpu buffer via the | ||
200 | write functions described below. Whenever a message can't fit into | ||
201 | the current sub-buffer, because there's no room left for it, the | ||
202 | client is notified via the subbuf_start() callback that a switch to a | ||
203 | new sub-buffer is about to occur. The client uses this callback to 1) | ||
204 | initialize the next sub-buffer if appropriate 2) finalize the previous | ||
205 | sub-buffer if appropriate and 3) return a boolean value indicating | ||
206 | whether or not to actually go ahead with the sub-buffer switch. | ||
207 | |||
208 | To implement 'no-overwrite' mode, the userspace client would provide | ||
209 | an implementation of the subbuf_start() callback something like the | ||
210 | following: | ||
211 | |||
212 | static int subbuf_start(struct rchan_buf *buf, | ||
213 | void *subbuf, | ||
214 | void *prev_subbuf, | ||
215 | unsigned int prev_padding) | ||
216 | { | ||
217 | if (prev_subbuf) | ||
218 | *((unsigned *)prev_subbuf) = prev_padding; | ||
219 | |||
220 | if (relay_buf_full(buf)) | ||
221 | return 0; | ||
222 | |||
223 | subbuf_start_reserve(buf, sizeof(unsigned int)); | ||
224 | |||
225 | return 1; | ||
226 | } | ||
227 | |||
228 | If the current buffer is full i.e. all sub-buffers remain unconsumed, | ||
229 | the callback returns 0 to indicate that the buffer switch should not | ||
230 | occur yet i.e. until the consumer has had a chance to read the current | ||
231 | set of ready sub-buffers. For the relay_buf_full() function to make | ||
232 | sense, the consumer is reponsible for notifying relayfs when | ||
233 | sub-buffers have been consumed via relay_subbufs_consumed(). Any | ||
234 | subsequent attempts to write into the buffer will again invoke the | ||
235 | subbuf_start() callback with the same parameters; only when the | ||
236 | consumer has consumed one or more of the ready sub-buffers will | ||
237 | relay_buf_full() return 0, in which case the buffer switch can | ||
238 | continue. | ||
239 | |||
240 | The implementation of the subbuf_start() callback for 'overwrite' mode | ||
241 | would be very similar: | ||
242 | |||
243 | static int subbuf_start(struct rchan_buf *buf, | ||
244 | void *subbuf, | ||
245 | void *prev_subbuf, | ||
246 | unsigned int prev_padding) | ||
247 | { | ||
248 | if (prev_subbuf) | ||
249 | *((unsigned *)prev_subbuf) = prev_padding; | ||
250 | |||
251 | subbuf_start_reserve(buf, sizeof(unsigned int)); | ||
252 | |||
253 | return 1; | ||
254 | } | ||
255 | |||
256 | In this case, the relay_buf_full() check is meaningless and the | ||
257 | callback always returns 1, causing the buffer switch to occur | ||
258 | unconditionally. It's also meaningless for the client to use the | ||
259 | relay_subbufs_consumed() function in this mode, as it's never | ||
260 | consulted. | ||
261 | |||
262 | The default subbuf_start() implementation, used if the client doesn't | ||
263 | define any callbacks, or doesn't define the subbuf_start() callback, | ||
264 | implements the simplest possible 'no-overwrite' mode i.e. it does | ||
265 | nothing but return 0. | ||
266 | |||
267 | Header information can be reserved at the beginning of each sub-buffer | ||
268 | by calling the subbuf_start_reserve() helper function from within the | ||
269 | subbuf_start() callback. This reserved area can be used to store | ||
270 | whatever information the client wants. In the example above, room is | ||
271 | reserved in each sub-buffer to store the padding count for that | ||
272 | sub-buffer. This is filled in for the previous sub-buffer in the | ||
273 | subbuf_start() implementation; the padding value for the previous | ||
274 | sub-buffer is passed into the subbuf_start() callback along with a | ||
275 | pointer to the previous sub-buffer, since the padding value isn't | ||
276 | known until a sub-buffer is filled. The subbuf_start() callback is | ||
277 | also called for the first sub-buffer when the channel is opened, to | ||
278 | give the client a chance to reserve space in it. In this case the | ||
279 | previous sub-buffer pointer passed into the callback will be NULL, so | ||
280 | the client should check the value of the prev_subbuf pointer before | ||
281 | writing into the previous sub-buffer. | ||
282 | |||
283 | Writing to a channel | ||
284 | -------------------- | ||
285 | |||
286 | kernel clients write data into the current cpu's channel buffer using | ||
287 | relay_write() or __relay_write(). relay_write() is the main logging | ||
288 | function - it uses local_irqsave() to protect the buffer and should be | ||
289 | used if you might be logging from interrupt context. If you know | ||
290 | you'll never be logging from interrupt context, you can use | ||
291 | __relay_write(), which only disables preemption. These functions | ||
292 | don't return a value, so you can't determine whether or not they | ||
293 | failed - the assumption is that you wouldn't want to check a return | ||
294 | value in the fast logging path anyway, and that they'll always succeed | ||
295 | unless the buffer is full and no-overwrite mode is being used, in | ||
296 | which case you can detect a failed write in the subbuf_start() | ||
297 | callback by calling the relay_buf_full() helper function. | ||
298 | |||
299 | relay_reserve() is used to reserve a slot in a channel buffer which | ||
300 | can be written to later. This would typically be used in applications | ||
301 | that need to write directly into a channel buffer without having to | ||
302 | stage data in a temporary buffer beforehand. Because the actual write | ||
303 | may not happen immediately after the slot is reserved, applications | ||
304 | using relay_reserve() can keep a count of the number of bytes actually | ||
305 | written, either in space reserved in the sub-buffers themselves or as | ||
306 | a separate array. See the 'reserve' example in the relay-apps tarball | ||
307 | at http://relayfs.sourceforge.net for an example of how this can be | ||
308 | done. Because the write is under control of the client and is | ||
309 | separated from the reserve, relay_reserve() doesn't protect the buffer | ||
310 | at all - it's up to the client to provide the appropriate | ||
311 | synchronization when using relay_reserve(). | ||
312 | |||
313 | Closing a channel | ||
314 | ----------------- | ||
315 | |||
316 | The client calls relay_close() when it's finished using the channel. | ||
317 | The channel and its associated buffers are destroyed when there are no | ||
318 | longer any references to any of the channel buffers. relay_flush() | ||
319 | forces a sub-buffer switch on all the channel buffers, and can be used | ||
320 | to finalize and process the last sub-buffers before the channel is | ||
321 | closed. | ||
322 | |||
323 | Misc | ||
324 | ---- | ||
325 | |||
326 | Some applications may want to keep a channel around and re-use it | ||
327 | rather than open and close a new channel for each use. relay_reset() | ||
328 | can be used for this purpose - it resets a channel to its initial | ||
329 | state without reallocating channel buffer memory or destroying | ||
330 | existing mappings. It should however only be called when it's safe to | ||
331 | do so i.e. when the channel isn't currently being written to. | ||
332 | |||
333 | Finally, there are a couple of utility callbacks that can be used for | ||
334 | different purposes. buf_mapped() is called whenever a channel buffer | ||
335 | is mmapped from user space and buf_unmapped() is called when it's | ||
336 | unmapped. The client can use this notification to trigger actions | ||
337 | within the kernel application, such as enabling/disabling logging to | ||
338 | the channel. | ||
339 | |||
340 | |||
341 | Resources | ||
342 | ========= | ||
343 | |||
344 | For news, example code, mailing list, etc. see the relayfs homepage: | ||
345 | |||
346 | http://relayfs.sourceforge.net | ||
347 | |||
348 | |||
349 | Credits | ||
350 | ======= | ||
351 | |||
352 | The ideas and specs for relayfs came about as a result of discussions | ||
353 | on tracing involving the following: | ||
354 | |||
355 | Michel Dagenais <michel.dagenais@polymtl.ca> | ||
356 | Richard Moore <richardj_moore@uk.ibm.com> | ||
357 | Bob Wisniewski <bob@watson.ibm.com> | ||
358 | Karim Yaghmour <karim@opersys.com> | ||
359 | Tom Zanussi <zanussi@us.ibm.com> | ||
360 | |||
361 | Also thanks to Hubertus Franke for a lot of useful suggestions and bug | ||
362 | reports. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt index dc276598a65a..c8bce82ddcac 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt | |||
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ void device_remove_file(struct device *, struct device_attribute *); | |||
90 | 90 | ||
91 | It also defines this helper for defining device attributes: | 91 | It also defines this helper for defining device attributes: |
92 | 92 | ||
93 | #define DEVICE_ATTR(_name,_mode,_show,_store) \ | 93 | #define DEVICE_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store) \ |
94 | struct device_attribute dev_attr_##_name = { \ | 94 | struct device_attribute dev_attr_##_name = { \ |
95 | .attr = {.name = __stringify(_name) , .mode = _mode }, \ | 95 | .attr = {.name = __stringify(_name) , .mode = _mode }, \ |
96 | .show = _show, \ | 96 | .show = _show, \ |
@@ -99,14 +99,14 @@ struct device_attribute dev_attr_##_name = { \ | |||
99 | 99 | ||
100 | For example, declaring | 100 | For example, declaring |
101 | 101 | ||
102 | static DEVICE_ATTR(foo,0644,show_foo,store_foo); | 102 | static DEVICE_ATTR(foo, S_IWUSR | S_IRUGO, show_foo, store_foo); |
103 | 103 | ||
104 | is equivalent to doing: | 104 | is equivalent to doing: |
105 | 105 | ||
106 | static struct device_attribute dev_attr_foo = { | 106 | static struct device_attribute dev_attr_foo = { |
107 | .attr = { | 107 | .attr = { |
108 | .name = "foo", | 108 | .name = "foo", |
109 | .mode = 0644, | 109 | .mode = S_IWUSR | S_IRUGO, |
110 | }, | 110 | }, |
111 | .show = show_foo, | 111 | .show = show_foo, |
112 | .store = store_foo, | 112 | .store = store_foo, |
@@ -121,8 +121,8 @@ set of sysfs operations for forwarding read and write calls to the | |||
121 | show and store methods of the attribute owners. | 121 | show and store methods of the attribute owners. |
122 | 122 | ||
123 | struct sysfs_ops { | 123 | struct sysfs_ops { |
124 | ssize_t (*show)(struct kobject *, struct attribute *,char *); | 124 | ssize_t (*show)(struct kobject *, struct attribute *, char *); |
125 | ssize_t (*store)(struct kobject *,struct attribute *,const char *); | 125 | ssize_t (*store)(struct kobject *, struct attribute *, const char *); |
126 | }; | 126 | }; |
127 | 127 | ||
128 | [ Subsystems should have already defined a struct kobj_type as a | 128 | [ Subsystems should have already defined a struct kobj_type as a |
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ calls the associated methods. | |||
137 | 137 | ||
138 | To illustrate: | 138 | To illustrate: |
139 | 139 | ||
140 | #define to_dev_attr(_attr) container_of(_attr,struct device_attribute,attr) | 140 | #define to_dev_attr(_attr) container_of(_attr, struct device_attribute, attr) |
141 | #define to_dev(d) container_of(d, struct device, kobj) | 141 | #define to_dev(d) container_of(d, struct device, kobj) |
142 | 142 | ||
143 | static ssize_t | 143 | static ssize_t |
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ dev_attr_show(struct kobject * kobj, struct attribute * attr, char * buf) | |||
148 | ssize_t ret = 0; | 148 | ssize_t ret = 0; |
149 | 149 | ||
150 | if (dev_attr->show) | 150 | if (dev_attr->show) |
151 | ret = dev_attr->show(dev,buf); | 151 | ret = dev_attr->show(dev, buf); |
152 | return ret; | 152 | return ret; |
153 | } | 153 | } |
154 | 154 | ||
@@ -216,16 +216,16 @@ A very simple (and naive) implementation of a device attribute is: | |||
216 | 216 | ||
217 | static ssize_t show_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, char *buf) | 217 | static ssize_t show_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, char *buf) |
218 | { | 218 | { |
219 | return sprintf(buf,"%s\n",dev->name); | 219 | return snprintf(buf, PAGE_SIZE, "%s\n", dev->name); |
220 | } | 220 | } |
221 | 221 | ||
222 | static ssize_t store_name(struct device * dev, const char * buf) | 222 | static ssize_t store_name(struct device * dev, const char * buf) |
223 | { | 223 | { |
224 | sscanf(buf,"%20s",dev->name); | 224 | sscanf(buf, "%20s", dev->name); |
225 | return strlen(buf); | 225 | return strnlen(buf, PAGE_SIZE); |
226 | } | 226 | } |
227 | 227 | ||
228 | static DEVICE_ATTR(name,S_IRUGO,show_name,store_name); | 228 | static DEVICE_ATTR(name, S_IRUGO, show_name, store_name); |
229 | 229 | ||
230 | 230 | ||
231 | (Note that the real implementation doesn't allow userspace to set the | 231 | (Note that the real implementation doesn't allow userspace to set the |
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ struct device_attribute { | |||
290 | 290 | ||
291 | Declaring: | 291 | Declaring: |
292 | 292 | ||
293 | DEVICE_ATTR(_name,_str,_mode,_show,_store); | 293 | DEVICE_ATTR(_name, _str, _mode, _show, _store); |
294 | 294 | ||
295 | Creation/Removal: | 295 | Creation/Removal: |
296 | 296 | ||
@@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ struct bus_attribute { | |||
310 | 310 | ||
311 | Declaring: | 311 | Declaring: |
312 | 312 | ||
313 | BUS_ATTR(_name,_mode,_show,_store) | 313 | BUS_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store) |
314 | 314 | ||
315 | Creation/Removal: | 315 | Creation/Removal: |
316 | 316 | ||
@@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ struct driver_attribute { | |||
331 | 331 | ||
332 | Declaring: | 332 | Declaring: |
333 | 333 | ||
334 | DRIVER_ATTR(_name,_mode,_show,_store) | 334 | DRIVER_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store) |
335 | 335 | ||
336 | Creation/Removal: | 336 | Creation/Removal: |
337 | 337 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/v9fs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/v9fs.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4e92feb6b507 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/v9fs.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ | |||
1 | V9FS: 9P2000 for Linux | ||
2 | ====================== | ||
3 | |||
4 | ABOUT | ||
5 | ===== | ||
6 | |||
7 | v9fs is a Unix implementation of the Plan 9 9p remote filesystem protocol. | ||
8 | |||
9 | This software was originally developed by Ron Minnich <rminnich@lanl.gov> | ||
10 | and Maya Gokhale <maya@lanl.gov>. Additional development by Greg Watson | ||
11 | <gwatson@lanl.gov> and most recently Eric Van Hensbergen | ||
12 | <ericvh@gmail.com> and Latchesar Ionkov <lucho@ionkov.net>. | ||
13 | |||
14 | USAGE | ||
15 | ===== | ||
16 | |||
17 | For remote file server: | ||
18 | |||
19 | mount -t 9P 10.10.1.2 /mnt/9 | ||
20 | |||
21 | For Plan 9 From User Space applications (http://swtch.com/plan9) | ||
22 | |||
23 | mount -t 9P `namespace`/acme /mnt/9 -o proto=unix,name=$USER | ||
24 | |||
25 | OPTIONS | ||
26 | ======= | ||
27 | |||
28 | proto=name select an alternative transport. Valid options are | ||
29 | currently: | ||
30 | unix - specifying a named pipe mount point | ||
31 | tcp - specifying a normal TCP/IP connection | ||
32 | fd - used passed file descriptors for connection | ||
33 | (see rfdno and wfdno) | ||
34 | |||
35 | name=name user name to attempt mount as on the remote server. The | ||
36 | server may override or ignore this value. Certain user | ||
37 | names may require authentication. | ||
38 | |||
39 | aname=name aname specifies the file tree to access when the server is | ||
40 | offering several exported file systems. | ||
41 | |||
42 | debug=n specifies debug level. The debug level is a bitmask. | ||
43 | 0x01 = display verbose error messages | ||
44 | 0x02 = developer debug (DEBUG_CURRENT) | ||
45 | 0x04 = display 9P trace | ||
46 | 0x08 = display VFS trace | ||
47 | 0x10 = display Marshalling debug | ||
48 | 0x20 = display RPC debug | ||
49 | 0x40 = display transport debug | ||
50 | 0x80 = display allocation debug | ||
51 | |||
52 | rfdno=n the file descriptor for reading with proto=fd | ||
53 | |||
54 | wfdno=n the file descriptor for writing with proto=fd | ||
55 | |||
56 | maxdata=n the number of bytes to use for 9P packet payload (msize) | ||
57 | |||
58 | port=n port to connect to on the remote server | ||
59 | |||
60 | timeout=n request timeouts (in ms) (default 60000ms) | ||
61 | |||
62 | noextend force legacy mode (no 9P2000.u semantics) | ||
63 | |||
64 | uid attempt to mount as a particular uid | ||
65 | |||
66 | gid attempt to mount with a particular gid | ||
67 | |||
68 | afid security channel - used by Plan 9 authentication protocols | ||
69 | |||
70 | nodevmap do not map special files - represent them as normal files. | ||
71 | This can be used to share devices/named pipes/sockets between | ||
72 | hosts. This functionality will be expanded in later versions. | ||
73 | |||
74 | RESOURCES | ||
75 | ========= | ||
76 | |||
77 | The Linux version of the 9P server, along with some client-side utilities | ||
78 | can be found at http://v9fs.sf.net (along with a CVS repository of the | ||
79 | development branch of this module). There are user and developer mailing | ||
80 | lists here, as well as a bug-tracker. | ||
81 | |||
82 | For more information on the Plan 9 Operating System check out | ||
83 | http://plan9.bell-labs.com/plan9 | ||
84 | |||
85 | For information on Plan 9 from User Space (Plan 9 applications and libraries | ||
86 | ported to Linux/BSD/OSX/etc) check out http://swtch.com/plan9 | ||
87 | |||
88 | |||
89 | STATUS | ||
90 | ====== | ||
91 | |||
92 | The 2.6 kernel support is working on PPC and x86. | ||
93 | |||
94 | PLEASE USE THE SOURCEFORGE BUG-TRACKER TO REPORT PROBLEMS. | ||
95 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index 3f318dd44c77..f042c12e0ed2 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt | |||
@@ -1,35 +1,27 @@ | |||
1 | /* -*- auto-fill -*- */ | ||
2 | 1 | ||
3 | Overview of the Virtual File System | 2 | Overview of the Linux Virtual File System |
4 | 3 | ||
5 | Richard Gooch <rgooch@atnf.csiro.au> | 4 | Original author: Richard Gooch <rgooch@atnf.csiro.au> |
6 | 5 | ||
7 | 5-JUL-1999 | 6 | Last updated on August 25, 2005 |
8 | 7 | ||
8 | Copyright (C) 1999 Richard Gooch | ||
9 | Copyright (C) 2005 Pekka Enberg | ||
9 | 10 | ||
10 | Conventions used in this document <section> | 11 | This file is released under the GPLv2. |
11 | ================================= | ||
12 | 12 | ||
13 | Each section in this document will have the string "<section>" at the | ||
14 | right-hand side of the section title. Each subsection will have | ||
15 | "<subsection>" at the right-hand side. These strings are meant to make | ||
16 | it easier to search through the document. | ||
17 | 13 | ||
18 | NOTE that the master copy of this document is available online at: | 14 | What is it? |
19 | http://www.atnf.csiro.au/~rgooch/linux/docs/vfs.txt | ||
20 | |||
21 | |||
22 | What is it? <section> | ||
23 | =========== | 15 | =========== |
24 | 16 | ||
25 | The Virtual File System (otherwise known as the Virtual Filesystem | 17 | The Virtual File System (otherwise known as the Virtual Filesystem |
26 | Switch) is the software layer in the kernel that provides the | 18 | Switch) is the software layer in the kernel that provides the |
27 | filesystem interface to userspace programs. It also provides an | 19 | filesystem interface to userspace programs. It also provides an |
28 | abstraction within the kernel which allows different filesystem | 20 | abstraction within the kernel which allows different filesystem |
29 | implementations to co-exist. | 21 | implementations to coexist. |
30 | 22 | ||
31 | 23 | ||
32 | A Quick Look At How It Works <section> | 24 | A Quick Look At How It Works |
33 | ============================ | 25 | ============================ |
34 | 26 | ||
35 | In this section I'll briefly describe how things work, before | 27 | In this section I'll briefly describe how things work, before |
@@ -38,7 +30,8 @@ when user programs open and manipulate files, and then look from the | |||
38 | other view which is how a filesystem is supported and subsequently | 30 | other view which is how a filesystem is supported and subsequently |
39 | mounted. | 31 | mounted. |
40 | 32 | ||
41 | Opening a File <subsection> | 33 | |
34 | Opening a File | ||
42 | -------------- | 35 | -------------- |
43 | 36 | ||
44 | The VFS implements the open(2), stat(2), chmod(2) and similar system | 37 | The VFS implements the open(2), stat(2), chmod(2) and similar system |
@@ -77,7 +70,7 @@ back to userspace. | |||
77 | 70 | ||
78 | Opening a file requires another operation: allocation of a file | 71 | Opening a file requires another operation: allocation of a file |
79 | structure (this is the kernel-side implementation of file | 72 | structure (this is the kernel-side implementation of file |
80 | descriptors). The freshly allocated file structure is initialised with | 73 | descriptors). The freshly allocated file structure is initialized with |
81 | a pointer to the dentry and a set of file operation member functions. | 74 | a pointer to the dentry and a set of file operation member functions. |
82 | These are taken from the inode data. The open() file method is then | 75 | These are taken from the inode data. The open() file method is then |
83 | called so the specific filesystem implementation can do it's work. You | 76 | called so the specific filesystem implementation can do it's work. You |
@@ -102,7 +95,8 @@ filesystem or driver code at the same time, on different | |||
102 | processors. You should ensure that access to shared resources is | 95 | processors. You should ensure that access to shared resources is |
103 | protected by appropriate locks. | 96 | protected by appropriate locks. |
104 | 97 | ||
105 | Registering and Mounting a Filesystem <subsection> | 98 | |
99 | Registering and Mounting a Filesystem | ||
106 | ------------------------------------- | 100 | ------------------------------------- |
107 | 101 | ||
108 | If you want to support a new kind of filesystem in the kernel, all you | 102 | If you want to support a new kind of filesystem in the kernel, all you |
@@ -123,17 +117,21 @@ updated to point to the root inode for the new filesystem. | |||
123 | It's now time to look at things in more detail. | 117 | It's now time to look at things in more detail. |
124 | 118 | ||
125 | 119 | ||
126 | struct file_system_type <section> | 120 | struct file_system_type |
127 | ======================= | 121 | ======================= |
128 | 122 | ||
129 | This describes the filesystem. As of kernel 2.1.99, the following | 123 | This describes the filesystem. As of kernel 2.6.13, the following |
130 | members are defined: | 124 | members are defined: |
131 | 125 | ||
132 | struct file_system_type { | 126 | struct file_system_type { |
133 | const char *name; | 127 | const char *name; |
134 | int fs_flags; | 128 | int fs_flags; |
135 | struct super_block *(*read_super) (struct super_block *, void *, int); | 129 | struct super_block *(*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int, |
136 | struct file_system_type * next; | 130 | const char *, void *); |
131 | void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *); | ||
132 | struct module *owner; | ||
133 | struct file_system_type * next; | ||
134 | struct list_head fs_supers; | ||
137 | }; | 135 | }; |
138 | 136 | ||
139 | name: the name of the filesystem type, such as "ext2", "iso9660", | 137 | name: the name of the filesystem type, such as "ext2", "iso9660", |
@@ -141,51 +139,97 @@ struct file_system_type { | |||
141 | 139 | ||
142 | fs_flags: various flags (i.e. FS_REQUIRES_DEV, FS_NO_DCACHE, etc.) | 140 | fs_flags: various flags (i.e. FS_REQUIRES_DEV, FS_NO_DCACHE, etc.) |
143 | 141 | ||
144 | read_super: the method to call when a new instance of this | 142 | get_sb: the method to call when a new instance of this |
145 | filesystem should be mounted | 143 | filesystem should be mounted |
146 | 144 | ||
147 | next: for internal VFS use: you should initialise this to NULL | 145 | kill_sb: the method to call when an instance of this filesystem |
146 | should be unmounted | ||
147 | |||
148 | owner: for internal VFS use: you should initialize this to THIS_MODULE in | ||
149 | most cases. | ||
148 | 150 | ||
149 | The read_super() method has the following arguments: | 151 | next: for internal VFS use: you should initialize this to NULL |
152 | |||
153 | The get_sb() method has the following arguments: | ||
150 | 154 | ||
151 | struct super_block *sb: the superblock structure. This is partially | 155 | struct super_block *sb: the superblock structure. This is partially |
152 | initialised by the VFS and the rest must be initialised by the | 156 | initialized by the VFS and the rest must be initialized by the |
153 | read_super() method | 157 | get_sb() method |
158 | |||
159 | int flags: mount flags | ||
160 | |||
161 | const char *dev_name: the device name we are mounting. | ||
154 | 162 | ||
155 | void *data: arbitrary mount options, usually comes as an ASCII | 163 | void *data: arbitrary mount options, usually comes as an ASCII |
156 | string | 164 | string |
157 | 165 | ||
158 | int silent: whether or not to be silent on error | 166 | int silent: whether or not to be silent on error |
159 | 167 | ||
160 | The read_super() method must determine if the block device specified | 168 | The get_sb() method must determine if the block device specified |
161 | in the superblock contains a filesystem of the type the method | 169 | in the superblock contains a filesystem of the type the method |
162 | supports. On success the method returns the superblock pointer, on | 170 | supports. On success the method returns the superblock pointer, on |
163 | failure it returns NULL. | 171 | failure it returns NULL. |
164 | 172 | ||
165 | The most interesting member of the superblock structure that the | 173 | The most interesting member of the superblock structure that the |
166 | read_super() method fills in is the "s_op" field. This is a pointer to | 174 | get_sb() method fills in is the "s_op" field. This is a pointer to |
167 | a "struct super_operations" which describes the next level of the | 175 | a "struct super_operations" which describes the next level of the |
168 | filesystem implementation. | 176 | filesystem implementation. |
169 | 177 | ||
178 | Usually, a filesystem uses generic one of the generic get_sb() | ||
179 | implementations and provides a fill_super() method instead. The | ||
180 | generic methods are: | ||
181 | |||
182 | get_sb_bdev: mount a filesystem residing on a block device | ||
170 | 183 | ||
171 | struct super_operations <section> | 184 | get_sb_nodev: mount a filesystem that is not backed by a device |
185 | |||
186 | get_sb_single: mount a filesystem which shares the instance between | ||
187 | all mounts | ||
188 | |||
189 | A fill_super() method implementation has the following arguments: | ||
190 | |||
191 | struct super_block *sb: the superblock structure. The method fill_super() | ||
192 | must initialize this properly. | ||
193 | |||
194 | void *data: arbitrary mount options, usually comes as an ASCII | ||
195 | string | ||
196 | |||
197 | int silent: whether or not to be silent on error | ||
198 | |||
199 | |||
200 | struct super_operations | ||
172 | ======================= | 201 | ======================= |
173 | 202 | ||
174 | This describes how the VFS can manipulate the superblock of your | 203 | This describes how the VFS can manipulate the superblock of your |
175 | filesystem. As of kernel 2.1.99, the following members are defined: | 204 | filesystem. As of kernel 2.6.13, the following members are defined: |
176 | 205 | ||
177 | struct super_operations { | 206 | struct super_operations { |
178 | void (*read_inode) (struct inode *); | 207 | struct inode *(*alloc_inode)(struct super_block *sb); |
179 | int (*write_inode) (struct inode *, int); | 208 | void (*destroy_inode)(struct inode *); |
180 | void (*put_inode) (struct inode *); | 209 | |
181 | void (*drop_inode) (struct inode *); | 210 | void (*read_inode) (struct inode *); |
182 | void (*delete_inode) (struct inode *); | 211 | |
183 | int (*notify_change) (struct dentry *, struct iattr *); | 212 | void (*dirty_inode) (struct inode *); |
184 | void (*put_super) (struct super_block *); | 213 | int (*write_inode) (struct inode *, int); |
185 | void (*write_super) (struct super_block *); | 214 | void (*put_inode) (struct inode *); |
186 | int (*statfs) (struct super_block *, struct statfs *, int); | 215 | void (*drop_inode) (struct inode *); |
187 | int (*remount_fs) (struct super_block *, int *, char *); | 216 | void (*delete_inode) (struct inode *); |
188 | void (*clear_inode) (struct inode *); | 217 | void (*put_super) (struct super_block *); |
218 | void (*write_super) (struct super_block *); | ||
219 | int (*sync_fs)(struct super_block *sb, int wait); | ||
220 | void (*write_super_lockfs) (struct super_block *); | ||
221 | void (*unlockfs) (struct super_block *); | ||
222 | int (*statfs) (struct super_block *, struct kstatfs *); | ||
223 | int (*remount_fs) (struct super_block *, int *, char *); | ||
224 | void (*clear_inode) (struct inode *); | ||
225 | void (*umount_begin) (struct super_block *); | ||
226 | |||
227 | void (*sync_inodes) (struct super_block *sb, | ||
228 | struct writeback_control *wbc); | ||
229 | int (*show_options)(struct seq_file *, struct vfsmount *); | ||
230 | |||
231 | ssize_t (*quota_read)(struct super_block *, int, char *, size_t, loff_t); | ||
232 | ssize_t (*quota_write)(struct super_block *, int, const char *, size_t, loff_t); | ||
189 | }; | 233 | }; |
190 | 234 | ||
191 | All methods are called without any locks being held, unless otherwise | 235 | All methods are called without any locks being held, unless otherwise |
@@ -193,43 +237,62 @@ noted. This means that most methods can block safely. All methods are | |||
193 | only called from a process context (i.e. not from an interrupt handler | 237 | only called from a process context (i.e. not from an interrupt handler |
194 | or bottom half). | 238 | or bottom half). |
195 | 239 | ||
240 | alloc_inode: this method is called by inode_alloc() to allocate memory | ||
241 | for struct inode and initialize it. | ||
242 | |||
243 | destroy_inode: this method is called by destroy_inode() to release | ||
244 | resources allocated for struct inode. | ||
245 | |||
196 | read_inode: this method is called to read a specific inode from the | 246 | read_inode: this method is called to read a specific inode from the |
197 | mounted filesystem. The "i_ino" member in the "struct inode" | 247 | mounted filesystem. The i_ino member in the struct inode is |
198 | will be initialised by the VFS to indicate which inode to | 248 | initialized by the VFS to indicate which inode to read. Other |
199 | read. Other members are filled in by this method | 249 | members are filled in by this method. |
250 | |||
251 | You can set this to NULL and use iget5_locked() instead of iget() | ||
252 | to read inodes. This is necessary for filesystems for which the | ||
253 | inode number is not sufficient to identify an inode. | ||
254 | |||
255 | dirty_inode: this method is called by the VFS to mark an inode dirty. | ||
200 | 256 | ||
201 | write_inode: this method is called when the VFS needs to write an | 257 | write_inode: this method is called when the VFS needs to write an |
202 | inode to disc. The second parameter indicates whether the write | 258 | inode to disc. The second parameter indicates whether the write |
203 | should be synchronous or not, not all filesystems check this flag. | 259 | should be synchronous or not, not all filesystems check this flag. |
204 | 260 | ||
205 | put_inode: called when the VFS inode is removed from the inode | 261 | put_inode: called when the VFS inode is removed from the inode |
206 | cache. This method is optional | 262 | cache. |
207 | 263 | ||
208 | drop_inode: called when the last access to the inode is dropped, | 264 | drop_inode: called when the last access to the inode is dropped, |
209 | with the inode_lock spinlock held. | 265 | with the inode_lock spinlock held. |
210 | 266 | ||
211 | This method should be either NULL (normal unix filesystem | 267 | This method should be either NULL (normal UNIX filesystem |
212 | semantics) or "generic_delete_inode" (for filesystems that do not | 268 | semantics) or "generic_delete_inode" (for filesystems that do not |
213 | want to cache inodes - causing "delete_inode" to always be | 269 | want to cache inodes - causing "delete_inode" to always be |
214 | called regardless of the value of i_nlink) | 270 | called regardless of the value of i_nlink) |
215 | 271 | ||
216 | The "generic_delete_inode()" behaviour is equivalent to the | 272 | The "generic_delete_inode()" behavior is equivalent to the |
217 | old practice of using "force_delete" in the put_inode() case, | 273 | old practice of using "force_delete" in the put_inode() case, |
218 | but does not have the races that the "force_delete()" approach | 274 | but does not have the races that the "force_delete()" approach |
219 | had. | 275 | had. |
220 | 276 | ||
221 | delete_inode: called when the VFS wants to delete an inode | 277 | delete_inode: called when the VFS wants to delete an inode |
222 | 278 | ||
223 | notify_change: called when VFS inode attributes are changed. If this | ||
224 | is NULL the VFS falls back to the write_inode() method. This | ||
225 | is called with the kernel lock held | ||
226 | |||
227 | put_super: called when the VFS wishes to free the superblock | 279 | put_super: called when the VFS wishes to free the superblock |
228 | (i.e. unmount). This is called with the superblock lock held | 280 | (i.e. unmount). This is called with the superblock lock held |
229 | 281 | ||
230 | write_super: called when the VFS superblock needs to be written to | 282 | write_super: called when the VFS superblock needs to be written to |
231 | disc. This method is optional | 283 | disc. This method is optional |
232 | 284 | ||
285 | sync_fs: called when VFS is writing out all dirty data associated with | ||
286 | a superblock. The second parameter indicates whether the method | ||
287 | should wait until the write out has been completed. Optional. | ||
288 | |||
289 | write_super_lockfs: called when VFS is locking a filesystem and forcing | ||
290 | it into a consistent state. This function is currently used by the | ||
291 | Logical Volume Manager (LVM). | ||
292 | |||
293 | unlockfs: called when VFS is unlocking a filesystem and making it writable | ||
294 | again. | ||
295 | |||
233 | statfs: called when the VFS needs to get filesystem statistics. This | 296 | statfs: called when the VFS needs to get filesystem statistics. This |
234 | is called with the kernel lock held | 297 | is called with the kernel lock held |
235 | 298 | ||
@@ -238,21 +301,31 @@ or bottom half). | |||
238 | 301 | ||
239 | clear_inode: called then the VFS clears the inode. Optional | 302 | clear_inode: called then the VFS clears the inode. Optional |
240 | 303 | ||
304 | umount_begin: called when the VFS is unmounting a filesystem. | ||
305 | |||
306 | sync_inodes: called when the VFS is writing out dirty data associated with | ||
307 | a superblock. | ||
308 | |||
309 | show_options: called by the VFS to show mount options for /proc/<pid>/mounts. | ||
310 | |||
311 | quota_read: called by the VFS to read from filesystem quota file. | ||
312 | |||
313 | quota_write: called by the VFS to write to filesystem quota file. | ||
314 | |||
241 | The read_inode() method is responsible for filling in the "i_op" | 315 | The read_inode() method is responsible for filling in the "i_op" |
242 | field. This is a pointer to a "struct inode_operations" which | 316 | field. This is a pointer to a "struct inode_operations" which |
243 | describes the methods that can be performed on individual inodes. | 317 | describes the methods that can be performed on individual inodes. |
244 | 318 | ||
245 | 319 | ||
246 | struct inode_operations <section> | 320 | struct inode_operations |
247 | ======================= | 321 | ======================= |
248 | 322 | ||
249 | This describes how the VFS can manipulate an inode in your | 323 | This describes how the VFS can manipulate an inode in your |
250 | filesystem. As of kernel 2.1.99, the following members are defined: | 324 | filesystem. As of kernel 2.6.13, the following members are defined: |
251 | 325 | ||
252 | struct inode_operations { | 326 | struct inode_operations { |
253 | struct file_operations * default_file_ops; | 327 | int (*create) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,int, struct nameidata *); |
254 | int (*create) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,int); | 328 | struct dentry * (*lookup) (struct inode *,struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); |
255 | int (*lookup) (struct inode *,struct dentry *); | ||
256 | int (*link) (struct dentry *,struct inode *,struct dentry *); | 329 | int (*link) (struct dentry *,struct inode *,struct dentry *); |
257 | int (*unlink) (struct inode *,struct dentry *); | 330 | int (*unlink) (struct inode *,struct dentry *); |
258 | int (*symlink) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,const char *); | 331 | int (*symlink) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,const char *); |
@@ -261,25 +334,22 @@ struct inode_operations { | |||
261 | int (*mknod) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,int,dev_t); | 334 | int (*mknod) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,int,dev_t); |
262 | int (*rename) (struct inode *, struct dentry *, | 335 | int (*rename) (struct inode *, struct dentry *, |
263 | struct inode *, struct dentry *); | 336 | struct inode *, struct dentry *); |
264 | int (*readlink) (struct dentry *, char *,int); | 337 | int (*readlink) (struct dentry *, char __user *,int); |
265 | struct dentry * (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct dentry *); | 338 | void * (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); |
266 | int (*readpage) (struct file *, struct page *); | 339 | void (*put_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *, void *); |
267 | int (*writepage) (struct page *page, struct writeback_control *wbc); | ||
268 | int (*bmap) (struct inode *,int); | ||
269 | void (*truncate) (struct inode *); | 340 | void (*truncate) (struct inode *); |
270 | int (*permission) (struct inode *, int); | 341 | int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, struct nameidata *); |
271 | int (*smap) (struct inode *,int); | 342 | int (*setattr) (struct dentry *, struct iattr *); |
272 | int (*updatepage) (struct file *, struct page *, const char *, | 343 | int (*getattr) (struct vfsmount *mnt, struct dentry *, struct kstat *); |
273 | unsigned long, unsigned int, int); | 344 | int (*setxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *,const void *,size_t,int); |
274 | int (*revalidate) (struct dentry *); | 345 | ssize_t (*getxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *, void *, size_t); |
346 | ssize_t (*listxattr) (struct dentry *, char *, size_t); | ||
347 | int (*removexattr) (struct dentry *, const char *); | ||
275 | }; | 348 | }; |
276 | 349 | ||
277 | Again, all methods are called without any locks being held, unless | 350 | Again, all methods are called without any locks being held, unless |
278 | otherwise noted. | 351 | otherwise noted. |
279 | 352 | ||
280 | default_file_ops: this is a pointer to a "struct file_operations" | ||
281 | which describes how to open and then manipulate open files | ||
282 | |||
283 | create: called by the open(2) and creat(2) system calls. Only | 353 | create: called by the open(2) and creat(2) system calls. Only |
284 | required if you want to support regular files. The dentry you | 354 | required if you want to support regular files. The dentry you |
285 | get should not have an inode (i.e. it should be a negative | 355 | get should not have an inode (i.e. it should be a negative |
@@ -328,31 +398,143 @@ otherwise noted. | |||
328 | you want to support reading symbolic links | 398 | you want to support reading symbolic links |
329 | 399 | ||
330 | follow_link: called by the VFS to follow a symbolic link to the | 400 | follow_link: called by the VFS to follow a symbolic link to the |
331 | inode it points to. Only required if you want to support | 401 | inode it points to. Only required if you want to support |
332 | symbolic links | 402 | symbolic links. This function returns a void pointer cookie |
403 | that is passed to put_link(). | ||
404 | |||
405 | put_link: called by the VFS to release resources allocated by | ||
406 | follow_link(). The cookie returned by follow_link() is passed to | ||
407 | to this function as the last parameter. It is used by filesystems | ||
408 | such as NFS where page cache is not stable (i.e. page that was | ||
409 | installed when the symbolic link walk started might not be in the | ||
410 | page cache at the end of the walk). | ||
411 | |||
412 | truncate: called by the VFS to change the size of a file. The i_size | ||
413 | field of the inode is set to the desired size by the VFS before | ||
414 | this function is called. This function is called by the truncate(2) | ||
415 | system call and related functionality. | ||
416 | |||
417 | permission: called by the VFS to check for access rights on a POSIX-like | ||
418 | filesystem. | ||
419 | |||
420 | setattr: called by the VFS to set attributes for a file. This function is | ||
421 | called by chmod(2) and related system calls. | ||
422 | |||
423 | getattr: called by the VFS to get attributes of a file. This function is | ||
424 | called by stat(2) and related system calls. | ||
425 | |||
426 | setxattr: called by the VFS to set an extended attribute for a file. | ||
427 | Extended attribute is a name:value pair associated with an inode. This | ||
428 | function is called by setxattr(2) system call. | ||
429 | |||
430 | getxattr: called by the VFS to retrieve the value of an extended attribute | ||
431 | name. This function is called by getxattr(2) function call. | ||
432 | |||
433 | listxattr: called by the VFS to list all extended attributes for a given | ||
434 | file. This function is called by listxattr(2) system call. | ||
435 | |||
436 | removexattr: called by the VFS to remove an extended attribute from a file. | ||
437 | This function is called by removexattr(2) system call. | ||
438 | |||
439 | |||
440 | struct address_space_operations | ||
441 | =============================== | ||
442 | |||
443 | This describes how the VFS can manipulate mapping of a file to page cache in | ||
444 | your filesystem. As of kernel 2.6.13, the following members are defined: | ||
445 | |||
446 | struct address_space_operations { | ||
447 | int (*writepage)(struct page *page, struct writeback_control *wbc); | ||
448 | int (*readpage)(struct file *, struct page *); | ||
449 | int (*sync_page)(struct page *); | ||
450 | int (*writepages)(struct address_space *, struct writeback_control *); | ||
451 | int (*set_page_dirty)(struct page *page); | ||
452 | int (*readpages)(struct file *filp, struct address_space *mapping, | ||
453 | struct list_head *pages, unsigned nr_pages); | ||
454 | int (*prepare_write)(struct file *, struct page *, unsigned, unsigned); | ||
455 | int (*commit_write)(struct file *, struct page *, unsigned, unsigned); | ||
456 | sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t); | ||
457 | int (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned long); | ||
458 | int (*releasepage) (struct page *, int); | ||
459 | ssize_t (*direct_IO)(int, struct kiocb *, const struct iovec *iov, | ||
460 | loff_t offset, unsigned long nr_segs); | ||
461 | struct page* (*get_xip_page)(struct address_space *, sector_t, | ||
462 | int); | ||
463 | }; | ||
464 | |||
465 | writepage: called by the VM write a dirty page to backing store. | ||
466 | |||
467 | readpage: called by the VM to read a page from backing store. | ||
468 | |||
469 | sync_page: called by the VM to notify the backing store to perform all | ||
470 | queued I/O operations for a page. I/O operations for other pages | ||
471 | associated with this address_space object may also be performed. | ||
472 | |||
473 | writepages: called by the VM to write out pages associated with the | ||
474 | address_space object. | ||
475 | |||
476 | set_page_dirty: called by the VM to set a page dirty. | ||
477 | |||
478 | readpages: called by the VM to read pages associated with the address_space | ||
479 | object. | ||
333 | 480 | ||
481 | prepare_write: called by the generic write path in VM to set up a write | ||
482 | request for a page. | ||
334 | 483 | ||
335 | struct file_operations <section> | 484 | commit_write: called by the generic write path in VM to write page to |
485 | its backing store. | ||
486 | |||
487 | bmap: called by the VFS to map a logical block offset within object to | ||
488 | physical block number. This method is use by for the legacy FIBMAP | ||
489 | ioctl. Other uses are discouraged. | ||
490 | |||
491 | invalidatepage: called by the VM on truncate to disassociate a page from its | ||
492 | address_space mapping. | ||
493 | |||
494 | releasepage: called by the VFS to release filesystem specific metadata from | ||
495 | a page. | ||
496 | |||
497 | direct_IO: called by the VM for direct I/O writes and reads. | ||
498 | |||
499 | get_xip_page: called by the VM to translate a block number to a page. | ||
500 | The page is valid until the corresponding filesystem is unmounted. | ||
501 | Filesystems that want to use execute-in-place (XIP) need to implement | ||
502 | it. An example implementation can be found in fs/ext2/xip.c. | ||
503 | |||
504 | |||
505 | struct file_operations | ||
336 | ====================== | 506 | ====================== |
337 | 507 | ||
338 | This describes how the VFS can manipulate an open file. As of kernel | 508 | This describes how the VFS can manipulate an open file. As of kernel |
339 | 2.1.99, the following members are defined: | 509 | 2.6.13, the following members are defined: |
340 | 510 | ||
341 | struct file_operations { | 511 | struct file_operations { |
342 | loff_t (*llseek) (struct file *, loff_t, int); | 512 | loff_t (*llseek) (struct file *, loff_t, int); |
343 | ssize_t (*read) (struct file *, char *, size_t, loff_t *); | 513 | ssize_t (*read) (struct file *, char __user *, size_t, loff_t *); |
344 | ssize_t (*write) (struct file *, const char *, size_t, loff_t *); | 514 | ssize_t (*aio_read) (struct kiocb *, char __user *, size_t, loff_t); |
515 | ssize_t (*write) (struct file *, const char __user *, size_t, loff_t *); | ||
516 | ssize_t (*aio_write) (struct kiocb *, const char __user *, size_t, loff_t); | ||
345 | int (*readdir) (struct file *, void *, filldir_t); | 517 | int (*readdir) (struct file *, void *, filldir_t); |
346 | unsigned int (*poll) (struct file *, struct poll_table_struct *); | 518 | unsigned int (*poll) (struct file *, struct poll_table_struct *); |
347 | int (*ioctl) (struct inode *, struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long); | 519 | int (*ioctl) (struct inode *, struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long); |
520 | long (*unlocked_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long); | ||
521 | long (*compat_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long); | ||
348 | int (*mmap) (struct file *, struct vm_area_struct *); | 522 | int (*mmap) (struct file *, struct vm_area_struct *); |
349 | int (*open) (struct inode *, struct file *); | 523 | int (*open) (struct inode *, struct file *); |
524 | int (*flush) (struct file *); | ||
350 | int (*release) (struct inode *, struct file *); | 525 | int (*release) (struct inode *, struct file *); |
351 | int (*fsync) (struct file *, struct dentry *); | 526 | int (*fsync) (struct file *, struct dentry *, int datasync); |
352 | int (*fasync) (struct file *, int); | 527 | int (*aio_fsync) (struct kiocb *, int datasync); |
353 | int (*check_media_change) (kdev_t dev); | 528 | int (*fasync) (int, struct file *, int); |
354 | int (*revalidate) (kdev_t dev); | ||
355 | int (*lock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *); | 529 | int (*lock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *); |
530 | ssize_t (*readv) (struct file *, const struct iovec *, unsigned long, loff_t *); | ||
531 | ssize_t (*writev) (struct file *, const struct iovec *, unsigned long, loff_t *); | ||
532 | ssize_t (*sendfile) (struct file *, loff_t *, size_t, read_actor_t, void *); | ||
533 | ssize_t (*sendpage) (struct file *, struct page *, int, size_t, loff_t *, int); | ||
534 | unsigned long (*get_unmapped_area)(struct file *, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long); | ||
535 | int (*check_flags)(int); | ||
536 | int (*dir_notify)(struct file *filp, unsigned long arg); | ||
537 | int (*flock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *); | ||
356 | }; | 538 | }; |
357 | 539 | ||
358 | Again, all methods are called without any locks being held, unless | 540 | Again, all methods are called without any locks being held, unless |
@@ -362,8 +544,12 @@ otherwise noted. | |||
362 | 544 | ||
363 | read: called by read(2) and related system calls | 545 | read: called by read(2) and related system calls |
364 | 546 | ||
547 | aio_read: called by io_submit(2) and other asynchronous I/O operations | ||
548 | |||
365 | write: called by write(2) and related system calls | 549 | write: called by write(2) and related system calls |
366 | 550 | ||
551 | aio_write: called by io_submit(2) and other asynchronous I/O operations | ||
552 | |||
367 | readdir: called when the VFS needs to read the directory contents | 553 | readdir: called when the VFS needs to read the directory contents |
368 | 554 | ||
369 | poll: called by the VFS when a process wants to check if there is | 555 | poll: called by the VFS when a process wants to check if there is |
@@ -372,18 +558,25 @@ otherwise noted. | |||
372 | 558 | ||
373 | ioctl: called by the ioctl(2) system call | 559 | ioctl: called by the ioctl(2) system call |
374 | 560 | ||
561 | unlocked_ioctl: called by the ioctl(2) system call. Filesystems that do not | ||
562 | require the BKL should use this method instead of the ioctl() above. | ||
563 | |||
564 | compat_ioctl: called by the ioctl(2) system call when 32 bit system calls | ||
565 | are used on 64 bit kernels. | ||
566 | |||
375 | mmap: called by the mmap(2) system call | 567 | mmap: called by the mmap(2) system call |
376 | 568 | ||
377 | open: called by the VFS when an inode should be opened. When the VFS | 569 | open: called by the VFS when an inode should be opened. When the VFS |
378 | opens a file, it creates a new "struct file" and initialises | 570 | opens a file, it creates a new "struct file". It then calls the |
379 | the "f_op" file operations member with the "default_file_ops" | 571 | open method for the newly allocated file structure. You might |
380 | field in the inode structure. It then calls the open method | 572 | think that the open method really belongs in |
381 | for the newly allocated file structure. You might think that | 573 | "struct inode_operations", and you may be right. I think it's |
382 | the open method really belongs in "struct inode_operations", | 574 | done the way it is because it makes filesystems simpler to |
383 | and you may be right. I think it's done the way it is because | 575 | implement. The open() method is a good place to initialize the |
384 | it makes filesystems simpler to implement. The open() method | 576 | "private_data" member in the file structure if you want to point |
385 | is a good place to initialise the "private_data" member in the | 577 | to a device structure |
386 | file structure if you want to point to a device structure | 578 | |
579 | flush: called by the close(2) system call to flush a file | ||
387 | 580 | ||
388 | release: called when the last reference to an open file is closed | 581 | release: called when the last reference to an open file is closed |
389 | 582 | ||
@@ -392,6 +585,23 @@ otherwise noted. | |||
392 | fasync: called by the fcntl(2) system call when asynchronous | 585 | fasync: called by the fcntl(2) system call when asynchronous |
393 | (non-blocking) mode is enabled for a file | 586 | (non-blocking) mode is enabled for a file |
394 | 587 | ||
588 | lock: called by the fcntl(2) system call for F_GETLK, F_SETLK, and F_SETLKW | ||
589 | commands | ||
590 | |||
591 | readv: called by the readv(2) system call | ||
592 | |||
593 | writev: called by the writev(2) system call | ||
594 | |||
595 | sendfile: called by the sendfile(2) system call | ||
596 | |||
597 | get_unmapped_area: called by the mmap(2) system call | ||
598 | |||
599 | check_flags: called by the fcntl(2) system call for F_SETFL command | ||
600 | |||
601 | dir_notify: called by the fcntl(2) system call for F_NOTIFY command | ||
602 | |||
603 | flock: called by the flock(2) system call | ||
604 | |||
395 | Note that the file operations are implemented by the specific | 605 | Note that the file operations are implemented by the specific |
396 | filesystem in which the inode resides. When opening a device node | 606 | filesystem in which the inode resides. When opening a device node |
397 | (character or block special) most filesystems will call special | 607 | (character or block special) most filesystems will call special |
@@ -400,29 +610,28 @@ driver information. These support routines replace the filesystem file | |||
400 | operations with those for the device driver, and then proceed to call | 610 | operations with those for the device driver, and then proceed to call |
401 | the new open() method for the file. This is how opening a device file | 611 | the new open() method for the file. This is how opening a device file |
402 | in the filesystem eventually ends up calling the device driver open() | 612 | in the filesystem eventually ends up calling the device driver open() |
403 | method. Note the devfs (the Device FileSystem) has a more direct path | 613 | method. |
404 | from device node to device driver (this is an unofficial kernel | ||
405 | patch). | ||
406 | 614 | ||
407 | 615 | ||
408 | Directory Entry Cache (dcache) <section> | 616 | Directory Entry Cache (dcache) |
409 | ------------------------------ | 617 | ============================== |
618 | |||
410 | 619 | ||
411 | struct dentry_operations | 620 | struct dentry_operations |
412 | ======================== | 621 | ------------------------ |
413 | 622 | ||
414 | This describes how a filesystem can overload the standard dentry | 623 | This describes how a filesystem can overload the standard dentry |
415 | operations. Dentries and the dcache are the domain of the VFS and the | 624 | operations. Dentries and the dcache are the domain of the VFS and the |
416 | individual filesystem implementations. Device drivers have no business | 625 | individual filesystem implementations. Device drivers have no business |
417 | here. These methods may be set to NULL, as they are either optional or | 626 | here. These methods may be set to NULL, as they are either optional or |
418 | the VFS uses a default. As of kernel 2.1.99, the following members are | 627 | the VFS uses a default. As of kernel 2.6.13, the following members are |
419 | defined: | 628 | defined: |
420 | 629 | ||
421 | struct dentry_operations { | 630 | struct dentry_operations { |
422 | int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *); | 631 | int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); |
423 | int (*d_hash) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *); | 632 | int (*d_hash) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *); |
424 | int (*d_compare) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *, struct qstr *); | 633 | int (*d_compare) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *, struct qstr *); |
425 | void (*d_delete)(struct dentry *); | 634 | int (*d_delete)(struct dentry *); |
426 | void (*d_release)(struct dentry *); | 635 | void (*d_release)(struct dentry *); |
427 | void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *); | 636 | void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *); |
428 | }; | 637 | }; |
@@ -451,6 +660,7 @@ Each dentry has a pointer to its parent dentry, as well as a hash list | |||
451 | of child dentries. Child dentries are basically like files in a | 660 | of child dentries. Child dentries are basically like files in a |
452 | directory. | 661 | directory. |
453 | 662 | ||
663 | |||
454 | Directory Entry Cache APIs | 664 | Directory Entry Cache APIs |
455 | -------------------------- | 665 | -------------------------- |
456 | 666 | ||
@@ -471,7 +681,7 @@ manipulate dentries: | |||
471 | "d_delete" method is called | 681 | "d_delete" method is called |
472 | 682 | ||
473 | d_drop: this unhashes a dentry from its parents hash list. A | 683 | d_drop: this unhashes a dentry from its parents hash list. A |
474 | subsequent call to dput() will dellocate the dentry if its | 684 | subsequent call to dput() will deallocate the dentry if its |
475 | usage count drops to 0 | 685 | usage count drops to 0 |
476 | 686 | ||
477 | d_delete: delete a dentry. If there are no other open references to | 687 | d_delete: delete a dentry. If there are no other open references to |
@@ -507,16 +717,16 @@ up by walking the tree starting with the first component | |||
507 | of the pathname and using that dentry along with the next | 717 | of the pathname and using that dentry along with the next |
508 | component to look up the next level and so on. Since it | 718 | component to look up the next level and so on. Since it |
509 | is a frequent operation for workloads like multiuser | 719 | is a frequent operation for workloads like multiuser |
510 | environments and webservers, it is important to optimize | 720 | environments and web servers, it is important to optimize |
511 | this path. | 721 | this path. |
512 | 722 | ||
513 | Prior to 2.5.10, dcache_lock was acquired in d_lookup and thus | 723 | Prior to 2.5.10, dcache_lock was acquired in d_lookup and thus |
514 | in every component during path look-up. Since 2.5.10 onwards, | 724 | in every component during path look-up. Since 2.5.10 onwards, |
515 | fastwalk algorithm changed this by holding the dcache_lock | 725 | fast-walk algorithm changed this by holding the dcache_lock |
516 | at the beginning and walking as many cached path component | 726 | at the beginning and walking as many cached path component |
517 | dentries as possible. This signficantly decreases the number | 727 | dentries as possible. This significantly decreases the number |
518 | of acquisition of dcache_lock. However it also increases the | 728 | of acquisition of dcache_lock. However it also increases the |
519 | lock hold time signficantly and affects performance in large | 729 | lock hold time significantly and affects performance in large |
520 | SMP machines. Since 2.5.62 kernel, dcache has been using | 730 | SMP machines. Since 2.5.62 kernel, dcache has been using |
521 | a new locking model that uses RCU to make dcache look-up | 731 | a new locking model that uses RCU to make dcache look-up |
522 | lock-free. | 732 | lock-free. |
@@ -527,7 +737,7 @@ protected the hash chain, d_child, d_alias, d_lru lists as well | |||
527 | as d_inode and several other things like mount look-up. RCU-based | 737 | as d_inode and several other things like mount look-up. RCU-based |
528 | changes affect only the way the hash chain is protected. For everything | 738 | changes affect only the way the hash chain is protected. For everything |
529 | else the dcache_lock must be taken for both traversing as well as | 739 | else the dcache_lock must be taken for both traversing as well as |
530 | updating. The hash chain updations too take the dcache_lock. | 740 | updating. The hash chain updates too take the dcache_lock. |
531 | The significant change is the way d_lookup traverses the hash chain, | 741 | The significant change is the way d_lookup traverses the hash chain, |
532 | it doesn't acquire the dcache_lock for this and rely on RCU to | 742 | it doesn't acquire the dcache_lock for this and rely on RCU to |
533 | ensure that the dentry has not been *freed*. | 743 | ensure that the dentry has not been *freed*. |
@@ -535,14 +745,15 @@ ensure that the dentry has not been *freed*. | |||
535 | 745 | ||
536 | Dcache locking details | 746 | Dcache locking details |
537 | ---------------------- | 747 | ---------------------- |
748 | |||
538 | For many multi-user workloads, open() and stat() on files are | 749 | For many multi-user workloads, open() and stat() on files are |
539 | very frequently occurring operations. Both involve walking | 750 | very frequently occurring operations. Both involve walking |
540 | of path names to find the dentry corresponding to the | 751 | of path names to find the dentry corresponding to the |
541 | concerned file. In 2.4 kernel, dcache_lock was held | 752 | concerned file. In 2.4 kernel, dcache_lock was held |
542 | during look-up of each path component. Contention and | 753 | during look-up of each path component. Contention and |
543 | cacheline bouncing of this global lock caused significant | 754 | cache-line bouncing of this global lock caused significant |
544 | scalability problems. With the introduction of RCU | 755 | scalability problems. With the introduction of RCU |
545 | in linux kernel, this was worked around by making | 756 | in Linux kernel, this was worked around by making |
546 | the look-up of path components during path walking lock-free. | 757 | the look-up of path components during path walking lock-free. |
547 | 758 | ||
548 | 759 | ||
@@ -562,7 +773,7 @@ Some of the important changes are : | |||
562 | 2. Insertion of a dentry into the hash table is done using | 773 | 2. Insertion of a dentry into the hash table is done using |
563 | hlist_add_head_rcu() which take care of ordering the writes - | 774 | hlist_add_head_rcu() which take care of ordering the writes - |
564 | the writes to the dentry must be visible before the dentry | 775 | the writes to the dentry must be visible before the dentry |
565 | is inserted. This works in conjuction with hlist_for_each_rcu() | 776 | is inserted. This works in conjunction with hlist_for_each_rcu() |
566 | while walking the hash chain. The only requirement is that | 777 | while walking the hash chain. The only requirement is that |
567 | all initialization to the dentry must be done before hlist_add_head_rcu() | 778 | all initialization to the dentry must be done before hlist_add_head_rcu() |
568 | since we don't have dcache_lock protection while traversing | 779 | since we don't have dcache_lock protection while traversing |
@@ -584,7 +795,7 @@ Some of the important changes are : | |||
584 | the same. In some sense, dcache_rcu path walking looks like | 795 | the same. In some sense, dcache_rcu path walking looks like |
585 | the pre-2.5.10 version. | 796 | the pre-2.5.10 version. |
586 | 797 | ||
587 | 5. All dentry hash chain updations must take the dcache_lock as well as | 798 | 5. All dentry hash chain updates must take the dcache_lock as well as |
588 | the per-dentry lock in that order. dput() does this to ensure | 799 | the per-dentry lock in that order. dput() does this to ensure |
589 | that a dentry that has just been looked up in another CPU | 800 | that a dentry that has just been looked up in another CPU |
590 | doesn't get deleted before dget() can be done on it. | 801 | doesn't get deleted before dget() can be done on it. |
@@ -640,10 +851,10 @@ handled as described below : | |||
640 | Since we redo the d_parent check and compare name while holding | 851 | Since we redo the d_parent check and compare name while holding |
641 | d_lock, lock-free look-up will not race against d_move(). | 852 | d_lock, lock-free look-up will not race against d_move(). |
642 | 853 | ||
643 | 4. There can be a theoritical race when a dentry keeps coming back | 854 | 4. There can be a theoretical race when a dentry keeps coming back |
644 | to original bucket due to double moves. Due to this look-up may | 855 | to original bucket due to double moves. Due to this look-up may |
645 | consider that it has never moved and can end up in a infinite loop. | 856 | consider that it has never moved and can end up in a infinite loop. |
646 | But this is not any worse that theoritical livelocks we already | 857 | But this is not any worse that theoretical livelocks we already |
647 | have in the kernel. | 858 | have in the kernel. |
648 | 859 | ||
649 | 860 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm78 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm78 index 357086ed7f64..fd5dc7a19f0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm78 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm78 | |||
@@ -2,16 +2,11 @@ Kernel driver lm78 | |||
2 | ================== | 2 | ================== |
3 | 3 | ||
4 | Supported chips: | 4 | Supported chips: |
5 | * National Semiconductor LM78 | 5 | * National Semiconductor LM78 / LM78-J |
6 | Prefix: 'lm78' | 6 | Prefix: 'lm78' |
7 | Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) | 7 | Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) |
8 | Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website | 8 | Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website |
9 | http://www.national.com/ | 9 | http://www.national.com/ |
10 | * National Semiconductor LM78-J | ||
11 | Prefix: 'lm78-j' | ||
12 | Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) | ||
13 | Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website | ||
14 | http://www.national.com/ | ||
15 | * National Semiconductor LM79 | 10 | * National Semiconductor LM79 |
16 | Prefix: 'lm79' | 11 | Prefix: 'lm79' |
17 | Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) | 12 | Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) |
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8171c285bb55 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ | |||
1 | Kernel driver w83792d | ||
2 | ===================== | ||
3 | |||
4 | Supported chips: | ||
5 | * Winbond W83792D | ||
6 | Prefix: 'w83792d' | ||
7 | Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f | ||
8 | Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com.tw/E-WINBONDHTM/partner/PDFresult.asp?Pname=1035 | ||
9 | |||
10 | Author: Chunhao Huang | ||
11 | Contact: DZShen <DZShen@Winbond.com.tw> | ||
12 | |||
13 | |||
14 | Module Parameters | ||
15 | ----------------- | ||
16 | |||
17 | * init int | ||
18 | (default 1) | ||
19 | Use 'init=0' to bypass initializing the chip. | ||
20 | Try this if your computer crashes when you load the module. | ||
21 | |||
22 | * force_subclients=bus,caddr,saddr,saddr | ||
23 | This is used to force the i2c addresses for subclients of | ||
24 | a certain chip. Example usage is `force_subclients=0,0x2f,0x4a,0x4b' | ||
25 | to force the subclients of chip 0x2f on bus 0 to i2c addresses | ||
26 | 0x4a and 0x4b. | ||
27 | |||
28 | |||
29 | Description | ||
30 | ----------- | ||
31 | |||
32 | This driver implements support for the Winbond W83792AD/D. | ||
33 | |||
34 | Detection of the chip can sometimes be foiled because it can be in an | ||
35 | internal state that allows no clean access (Bank with ID register is not | ||
36 | currently selected). If you know the address of the chip, use a 'force' | ||
37 | parameter; this will put it into a more well-behaved state first. | ||
38 | |||
39 | The driver implements three temperature sensors, seven fan rotation speed | ||
40 | sensors, nine voltage sensors, and two automatic fan regulation | ||
41 | strategies called: Smart Fan I (Thermal Cruise mode) and Smart Fan II. | ||
42 | Automatic fan control mode is possible only for fan1-fan3. Fan4-fan7 can run | ||
43 | synchronized with selected fan (fan1-fan3). This functionality and manual PWM | ||
44 | control for fan4-fan7 is not yet implemented. | ||
45 | |||
46 | Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is 1 | ||
47 | degC for temp1 and 0.5 degC for temp2 and temp3. An alarm is triggered when | ||
48 | the temperature gets higher than the Overtemperature Shutdown value; it stays | ||
49 | on until the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value. | ||
50 | |||
51 | Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is | ||
52 | triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan | ||
53 | readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or | ||
54 | 128) to give the readings more range or accuracy. | ||
55 | |||
56 | Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts. | ||
57 | An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum | ||
58 | or maximum limit. | ||
59 | |||
60 | Alarms are provided as output from "realtime status register". Following bits | ||
61 | are defined: | ||
62 | |||
63 | bit - alarm on: | ||
64 | 0 - in0 | ||
65 | 1 - in1 | ||
66 | 2 - temp1 | ||
67 | 3 - temp2 | ||
68 | 4 - temp3 | ||
69 | 5 - fan1 | ||
70 | 6 - fan2 | ||
71 | 7 - fan3 | ||
72 | 8 - in2 | ||
73 | 9 - in3 | ||
74 | 10 - in4 | ||
75 | 11 - in5 | ||
76 | 12 - in6 | ||
77 | 13 - VID change | ||
78 | 14 - chassis | ||
79 | 15 - fan7 | ||
80 | 16 - tart1 | ||
81 | 17 - tart2 | ||
82 | 18 - tart3 | ||
83 | 19 - in7 | ||
84 | 20 - in8 | ||
85 | 21 - fan4 | ||
86 | 22 - fan5 | ||
87 | 23 - fan6 | ||
88 | |||
89 | Tart will be asserted while target temperature cannot be achieved after 3 minutes | ||
90 | of full speed rotation of corresponding fan. | ||
91 | |||
92 | In addition to the alarms described above, there is a CHAS alarm on the chips | ||
93 | which triggers if your computer case is open (This one is latched, contrary | ||
94 | to realtime alarms). | ||
95 | |||
96 | The chips only update values each 3 seconds; reading them more often will | ||
97 | do no harm, but will return 'old' values. | ||
98 | |||
99 | |||
100 | W83792D PROBLEMS | ||
101 | ---------------- | ||
102 | Known problems: | ||
103 | - This driver is only for Winbond W83792D C version device, there | ||
104 | are also some motherboards with B version W83792D device. The | ||
105 | calculation method to in6-in7(measured value, limits) is a little | ||
106 | different between C and B version. C or B version can be identified | ||
107 | by CR[0x49h]. | ||
108 | - The function of vid and vrm has not been finished, because I'm NOT | ||
109 | very familiar with them. Adding support is welcome. | ||
110 | - The function of chassis open detection needs more tests. | ||
111 | - If you have ASUS server board and chip was not found: Then you will | ||
112 | need to upgrade to latest (or beta) BIOS. If it does not help please | ||
113 | contact us. | ||
114 | |||
115 | Fan control | ||
116 | ----------- | ||
117 | |||
118 | Manual mode | ||
119 | ----------- | ||
120 | |||
121 | Works as expected. You just need to specify desired PWM/DC value (fan speed) | ||
122 | in appropriate pwm# file. | ||
123 | |||
124 | Thermal cruise | ||
125 | -------------- | ||
126 | |||
127 | In this mode, W83792D provides the Smart Fan system to automatically control | ||
128 | fan speed to keep the temperatures of CPU and the system within specific | ||
129 | range. At first a wanted temperature and interval must be set. This is done | ||
130 | via thermal_cruise# file. The tolerance# file serves to create T +- tolerance | ||
131 | interval. The fan speed will be lowered as long as the current temperature | ||
132 | remains below the thermal_cruise# +- tolerance# value. Once the temperature | ||
133 | exceeds the high limit (T+tolerance), the fan will be turned on with a | ||
134 | specific speed set by pwm# and automatically controlled its PWM duty cycle | ||
135 | with the temperature varying. Three conditions may occur: | ||
136 | |||
137 | (1) If the temperature still exceeds the high limit, PWM duty | ||
138 | cycle will increase slowly. | ||
139 | |||
140 | (2) If the temperature goes below the high limit, but still above the low | ||
141 | limit (T-tolerance), the fan speed will be fixed at the current speed because | ||
142 | the temperature is in the target range. | ||
143 | |||
144 | (3) If the temperature goes below the low limit, PWM duty cycle will decrease | ||
145 | slowly to 0 or a preset stop value until the temperature exceeds the low | ||
146 | limit. (The preset stop value handling is not yet implemented in driver) | ||
147 | |||
148 | Smart Fan II | ||
149 | ------------ | ||
150 | |||
151 | W83792D also provides a special mode for fan. Four temperature points are | ||
152 | available. When related temperature sensors detects the temperature in preset | ||
153 | temperature region (sf2_point@_fan# +- tolerance#) it will cause fans to run | ||
154 | on programmed value from sf2_level@_fan#. You need to set four temperatures | ||
155 | for each fan. | ||
156 | |||
157 | |||
158 | /sys files | ||
159 | ---------- | ||
160 | |||
161 | pwm[1-3] - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range: | ||
162 | 0 (stop) to 255 (full) | ||
163 | pwm[1-3]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control: | ||
164 | * 0 Disabled | ||
165 | * 1 Manual mode | ||
166 | * 2 Smart Fan II | ||
167 | * 3 Thermal Cruise | ||
168 | pwm[1-3]_mode - Select PWM of DC mode | ||
169 | * 0 DC | ||
170 | * 1 PWM | ||
171 | thermal_cruise[1-3] - Selects the desired temperature for cruise (degC) | ||
172 | tolerance[1-3] - Value in degrees of Celsius (degC) for +- T | ||
173 | sf2_point[1-4]_fan[1-3] - four temperature points for each fan for Smart Fan II | ||
174 | sf2_level[1-3]_fan[1-3] - three PWM/DC levels for each fan for Smart Fan II | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/max6875 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/max6875 index b02002898a09..96fec562a8e9 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/chips/max6875 +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/max6875 | |||
@@ -4,22 +4,13 @@ Kernel driver max6875 | |||
4 | Supported chips: | 4 | Supported chips: |
5 | * Maxim MAX6874, MAX6875 | 5 | * Maxim MAX6874, MAX6875 |
6 | Prefix: 'max6875' | 6 | Prefix: 'max6875' |
7 | Addresses scanned: 0x50, 0x52 | 7 | Addresses scanned: None (see below) |
8 | Datasheet: | 8 | Datasheet: |
9 | http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6874-MAX6875.pdf | 9 | http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6874-MAX6875.pdf |
10 | 10 | ||
11 | Author: Ben Gardner <bgardner@wabtec.com> | 11 | Author: Ben Gardner <bgardner@wabtec.com> |
12 | 12 | ||
13 | 13 | ||
14 | Module Parameters | ||
15 | ----------------- | ||
16 | |||
17 | * allow_write int | ||
18 | Set to non-zero to enable write permission: | ||
19 | *0: Read only | ||
20 | 1: Read and write | ||
21 | |||
22 | |||
23 | Description | 14 | Description |
24 | ----------- | 15 | ----------- |
25 | 16 | ||
@@ -33,34 +24,85 @@ registers. | |||
33 | 24 | ||
34 | The Maxim MAX6874 is a similar, mostly compatible device, with more intputs | 25 | The Maxim MAX6874 is a similar, mostly compatible device, with more intputs |
35 | and outputs: | 26 | and outputs: |
36 | |||
37 | vin gpi vout | 27 | vin gpi vout |
38 | MAX6874 6 4 8 | 28 | MAX6874 6 4 8 |
39 | MAX6875 4 3 5 | 29 | MAX6875 4 3 5 |
40 | 30 | ||
41 | MAX6874 chips can have four different addresses (as opposed to only two for | 31 | See the datasheet for more information. |
42 | the MAX6875). The additional addresses (0x54 and 0x56) are not probed by | ||
43 | this driver by default, but the probe module parameter can be used if | ||
44 | needed. | ||
45 | |||
46 | See the datasheet for details on how to program the EEPROM. | ||
47 | 32 | ||
48 | 33 | ||
49 | Sysfs entries | 34 | Sysfs entries |
50 | ------------- | 35 | ------------- |
51 | 36 | ||
52 | eeprom_user - 512 bytes of user-defined EEPROM space. Only writable if | 37 | eeprom - 512 bytes of user-defined EEPROM space. |
53 | allow_write was set and register 0x43 is 0. | ||
54 | |||
55 | eeprom_config - 70 bytes of config EEPROM. Note that changes will not get | ||
56 | loaded into register space until a power cycle or device reset. | ||
57 | |||
58 | reg_config - 70 bytes of register space. Any changes take affect immediately. | ||
59 | 38 | ||
60 | 39 | ||
61 | General Remarks | 40 | General Remarks |
62 | --------------- | 41 | --------------- |
63 | 42 | ||
64 | A typical application will require that the EEPROMs be programmed once and | 43 | Valid addresses for the MAX6875 are 0x50 and 0x52. |
65 | never altered afterwards. | 44 | Valid addresses for the MAX6874 are 0x50, 0x52, 0x54 and 0x56. |
45 | The driver does not probe any address, so you must force the address. | ||
46 | |||
47 | Example: | ||
48 | $ modprobe max6875 force=0,0x50 | ||
49 | |||
50 | The MAX6874/MAX6875 ignores address bit 0, so this driver attaches to multiple | ||
51 | addresses. For example, for address 0x50, it also reserves 0x51. | ||
52 | The even-address instance is called 'max6875', the odd one is 'max6875 subclient'. | ||
53 | |||
54 | |||
55 | Programming the chip using i2c-dev | ||
56 | ---------------------------------- | ||
57 | |||
58 | Use the i2c-dev interface to access and program the chips. | ||
59 | Reads and writes are performed differently depending on the address range. | ||
60 | |||
61 | The configuration registers are at addresses 0x00 - 0x45. | ||
62 | Use i2c_smbus_write_byte_data() to write a register and | ||
63 | i2c_smbus_read_byte_data() to read a register. | ||
64 | The command is the register number. | ||
65 | |||
66 | Examples: | ||
67 | To write a 1 to register 0x45: | ||
68 | i2c_smbus_write_byte_data(fd, 0x45, 1); | ||
69 | |||
70 | To read register 0x45: | ||
71 | value = i2c_smbus_read_byte_data(fd, 0x45); | ||
72 | |||
73 | |||
74 | The configuration EEPROM is at addresses 0x8000 - 0x8045. | ||
75 | The user EEPROM is at addresses 0x8100 - 0x82ff. | ||
76 | |||
77 | Use i2c_smbus_write_word_data() to write a byte to EEPROM. | ||
78 | |||
79 | The command is the upper byte of the address: 0x80, 0x81, or 0x82. | ||
80 | The data word is the lower part of the address or'd with data << 8. | ||
81 | cmd = address >> 8; | ||
82 | val = (address & 0xff) | (data << 8); | ||
83 | |||
84 | Example: | ||
85 | To write 0x5a to address 0x8003: | ||
86 | i2c_smbus_write_word_data(fd, 0x80, 0x5a03); | ||
87 | |||
88 | |||
89 | Reading data from the EEPROM is a little more complicated. | ||
90 | Use i2c_smbus_write_byte_data() to set the read address and then | ||
91 | i2c_smbus_read_byte() or i2c_smbus_read_i2c_block_data() to read the data. | ||
92 | |||
93 | Example: | ||
94 | To read data starting at offset 0x8100, first set the address: | ||
95 | i2c_smbus_write_byte_data(fd, 0x81, 0x00); | ||
96 | |||
97 | And then read the data | ||
98 | value = i2c_smbus_read_byte(fd); | ||
99 | |||
100 | or | ||
101 | |||
102 | count = i2c_smbus_read_i2c_block_data(fd, 0x84, buffer); | ||
103 | |||
104 | The block read should read 16 bytes. | ||
105 | 0x84 is the block read command. | ||
106 | |||
107 | See the datasheet for more details. | ||
66 | 108 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/functionality b/Documentation/i2c/functionality index 8a78a95ae04e..41ffefbdc60c 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/functionality +++ b/Documentation/i2c/functionality | |||
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ CHECKING THROUGH /DEV | |||
115 | If you try to access an adapter from a userspace program, you will have | 115 | If you try to access an adapter from a userspace program, you will have |
116 | to use the /dev interface. You will still have to check whether the | 116 | to use the /dev interface. You will still have to check whether the |
117 | functionality you need is supported, of course. This is done using | 117 | functionality you need is supported, of course. This is done using |
118 | the I2C_FUNCS ioctl. An example, adapted from the lm_sensors i2c_detect | 118 | the I2C_FUNCS ioctl. An example, adapted from the lm_sensors i2cdetect |
119 | program, is below: | 119 | program, is below: |
120 | 120 | ||
121 | int file; | 121 | int file; |
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/porting-clients b/Documentation/i2c/porting-clients index a7adbdd9ea8a..4849dfd6961c 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/porting-clients +++ b/Documentation/i2c/porting-clients | |||
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ | |||
1 | Revision 4, 2004-03-30 | 1 | Revision 5, 2005-07-29 |
2 | Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> | 2 | Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> |
3 | Greg KH <greg@kroah.com> | 3 | Greg KH <greg@kroah.com> |
4 | 4 | ||
@@ -17,20 +17,22 @@ yours for best results. | |||
17 | 17 | ||
18 | Technical changes: | 18 | Technical changes: |
19 | 19 | ||
20 | * [Includes] Get rid of "version.h". Replace <linux/i2c-proc.h> with | 20 | * [Includes] Get rid of "version.h" and <linux/i2c-proc.h>. |
21 | <linux/i2c-sensor.h>. Includes typically look like that: | 21 | Includes typically look like that: |
22 | #include <linux/module.h> | 22 | #include <linux/module.h> |
23 | #include <linux/init.h> | 23 | #include <linux/init.h> |
24 | #include <linux/slab.h> | 24 | #include <linux/slab.h> |
25 | #include <linux/i2c.h> | 25 | #include <linux/i2c.h> |
26 | #include <linux/i2c-sensor.h> | 26 | #include <linux/hwmon.h> /* for hardware monitoring drivers */ |
27 | #include <linux/i2c-vid.h> /* if you need VRM support */ | 27 | #include <linux/hwmon-sysfs.h> |
28 | #include <linux/hwmon-vid.h> /* if you need VRM support */ | ||
28 | #include <asm/io.h> /* if you have I/O operations */ | 29 | #include <asm/io.h> /* if you have I/O operations */ |
29 | Please respect this inclusion order. Some extra headers may be | 30 | Please respect this inclusion order. Some extra headers may be |
30 | required for a given driver (e.g. "lm75.h"). | 31 | required for a given driver (e.g. "lm75.h"). |
31 | 32 | ||
32 | * [Addresses] SENSORS_I2C_END becomes I2C_CLIENT_END, SENSORS_ISA_END | 33 | * [Addresses] SENSORS_I2C_END becomes I2C_CLIENT_END, ISA addresses |
33 | becomes I2C_CLIENT_ISA_END. | 34 | are no more handled by the i2c core. |
35 | SENSORS_INSMOD_<n> becomes I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD_<n>. | ||
34 | 36 | ||
35 | * [Client data] Get rid of sysctl_id. Try using standard names for | 37 | * [Client data] Get rid of sysctl_id. Try using standard names for |
36 | register values (for example, temp_os becomes temp_max). You're | 38 | register values (for example, temp_os becomes temp_max). You're |
@@ -66,13 +68,15 @@ Technical changes: | |||
66 | if (!(adapter->class & I2C_CLASS_HWMON)) | 68 | if (!(adapter->class & I2C_CLASS_HWMON)) |
67 | return 0; | 69 | return 0; |
68 | ISA-only drivers of course don't need this. | 70 | ISA-only drivers of course don't need this. |
71 | Call i2c_probe() instead of i2c_detect(). | ||
69 | 72 | ||
70 | * [Detect] As mentioned earlier, the flags parameter is gone. | 73 | * [Detect] As mentioned earlier, the flags parameter is gone. |
71 | The type_name and client_name strings are replaced by a single | 74 | The type_name and client_name strings are replaced by a single |
72 | name string, which will be filled with a lowercase, short string | 75 | name string, which will be filled with a lowercase, short string |
73 | (typically the driver name, e.g. "lm75"). | 76 | (typically the driver name, e.g. "lm75"). |
74 | In i2c-only drivers, drop the i2c_is_isa_adapter check, it's | 77 | In i2c-only drivers, drop the i2c_is_isa_adapter check, it's |
75 | useless. | 78 | useless. Same for isa-only drivers, as the test would always be |
79 | true. Only hybrid drivers (which are quite rare) still need it. | ||
76 | The errorN labels are reduced to the number needed. If that number | 80 | The errorN labels are reduced to the number needed. If that number |
77 | is 2 (i2c-only drivers), it is advised that the labels are named | 81 | is 2 (i2c-only drivers), it is advised that the labels are named |
78 | exit and exit_free. For i2c+isa drivers, labels should be named | 82 | exit and exit_free. For i2c+isa drivers, labels should be named |
@@ -86,6 +90,8 @@ Technical changes: | |||
86 | device_create_file. Move the driver initialization before any | 90 | device_create_file. Move the driver initialization before any |
87 | sysfs file creation. | 91 | sysfs file creation. |
88 | Drop client->id. | 92 | Drop client->id. |
93 | Drop any 24RF08 corruption prevention you find, as this is now done | ||
94 | at the i2c-core level, and doing it twice voids it. | ||
89 | 95 | ||
90 | * [Init] Limits must not be set by the driver (can be done later in | 96 | * [Init] Limits must not be set by the driver (can be done later in |
91 | user-space). Chip should not be reset default (although a module | 97 | user-space). Chip should not be reset default (although a module |
@@ -93,7 +99,8 @@ Technical changes: | |||
93 | limited to the strictly necessary steps. | 99 | limited to the strictly necessary steps. |
94 | 100 | ||
95 | * [Detach] Get rid of data, remove the call to | 101 | * [Detach] Get rid of data, remove the call to |
96 | i2c_deregister_entry. | 102 | i2c_deregister_entry. Do not log an error message if |
103 | i2c_detach_client fails, as i2c-core will now do it for you. | ||
97 | 104 | ||
98 | * [Update] Don't access client->data directly, use | 105 | * [Update] Don't access client->data directly, use |
99 | i2c_get_clientdata(client) instead. | 106 | i2c_get_clientdata(client) instead. |
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients index 91664be91ffc..077275722a7c 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients +++ b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients | |||
@@ -148,15 +148,15 @@ are defined in i2c.h to help you support them, as well as a generic | |||
148 | detection algorithm. | 148 | detection algorithm. |
149 | 149 | ||
150 | You do not have to use this parameter interface; but don't try to use | 150 | You do not have to use this parameter interface; but don't try to use |
151 | function i2c_probe() (or i2c_detect()) if you don't. | 151 | function i2c_probe() if you don't. |
152 | 152 | ||
153 | NOTE: If you want to write a `sensors' driver, the interface is slightly | 153 | NOTE: If you want to write a `sensors' driver, the interface is slightly |
154 | different! See below. | 154 | different! See below. |
155 | 155 | ||
156 | 156 | ||
157 | 157 | ||
158 | Probing classes (i2c) | 158 | Probing classes |
159 | --------------------- | 159 | --------------- |
160 | 160 | ||
161 | All parameters are given as lists of unsigned 16-bit integers. Lists are | 161 | All parameters are given as lists of unsigned 16-bit integers. Lists are |
162 | terminated by I2C_CLIENT_END. | 162 | terminated by I2C_CLIENT_END. |
@@ -171,12 +171,18 @@ The following lists are used internally: | |||
171 | ignore: insmod parameter. | 171 | ignore: insmod parameter. |
172 | A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), | 172 | A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), |
173 | the second is the I2C address. These addresses are never probed. | 173 | the second is the I2C address. These addresses are never probed. |
174 | This parameter overrules 'normal' and 'probe', but not the 'force' lists. | 174 | This parameter overrules the 'normal_i2c' list only. |
175 | force: insmod parameter. | 175 | force: insmod parameter. |
176 | A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), | 176 | A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), |
177 | the second is the I2C address. A device is blindly assumed to be on | 177 | the second is the I2C address. A device is blindly assumed to be on |
178 | the given address, no probing is done. | 178 | the given address, no probing is done. |
179 | 179 | ||
180 | Additionally, kind-specific force lists may optionally be defined if | ||
181 | the driver supports several chip kinds. They are grouped in a | ||
182 | NULL-terminated list of pointers named forces, those first element if the | ||
183 | generic force list mentioned above. Each additional list correspond to an | ||
184 | insmod parameter of the form force_<kind>. | ||
185 | |||
180 | Fortunately, as a module writer, you just have to define the `normal_i2c' | 186 | Fortunately, as a module writer, you just have to define the `normal_i2c' |
181 | parameter. The complete declaration could look like this: | 187 | parameter. The complete declaration could look like this: |
182 | 188 | ||
@@ -186,66 +192,17 @@ parameter. The complete declaration could look like this: | |||
186 | 192 | ||
187 | /* Magic definition of all other variables and things */ | 193 | /* Magic definition of all other variables and things */ |
188 | I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD; | 194 | I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD; |
195 | /* Or, if your driver supports, say, 2 kind of devices: */ | ||
196 | I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD_2(foo, bar); | ||
197 | |||
198 | If you use the multi-kind form, an enum will be defined for you: | ||
199 | enum chips { any_chip, foo, bar, ... } | ||
200 | You can then (and certainly should) use it in the driver code. | ||
189 | 201 | ||
190 | Note that you *have* to call the defined variable `normal_i2c', | 202 | Note that you *have* to call the defined variable `normal_i2c', |
191 | without any prefix! | 203 | without any prefix! |
192 | 204 | ||
193 | 205 | ||
194 | Probing classes (sensors) | ||
195 | ------------------------- | ||
196 | |||
197 | If you write a `sensors' driver, you use a slightly different interface. | ||
198 | As well as I2C addresses, we have to cope with ISA addresses. Also, we | ||
199 | use a enum of chip types. Don't forget to include `sensors.h'. | ||
200 | |||
201 | The following lists are used internally. They are all lists of integers. | ||
202 | |||
203 | normal_i2c: filled in by the module writer. Terminated by SENSORS_I2C_END. | ||
204 | A list of I2C addresses which should normally be examined. | ||
205 | normal_isa: filled in by the module writer. Terminated by SENSORS_ISA_END. | ||
206 | A list of ISA addresses which should normally be examined. | ||
207 | probe: insmod parameter. Initialize this list with SENSORS_I2C_END values. | ||
208 | A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (SENSORS_ISA_BUS for | ||
209 | the ISA bus, -1 for any I2C bus), the second is the address. These | ||
210 | addresses are also probed, as if they were in the 'normal' list. | ||
211 | ignore: insmod parameter. Initialize this list with SENSORS_I2C_END values. | ||
212 | A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (SENSORS_ISA_BUS for | ||
213 | the ISA bus, -1 for any I2C bus), the second is the I2C address. These | ||
214 | addresses are never probed. This parameter overrules 'normal' and | ||
215 | 'probe', but not the 'force' lists. | ||
216 | |||
217 | Also used is a list of pointers to sensors_force_data structures: | ||
218 | force_data: insmod parameters. A list, ending with an element of which | ||
219 | the force field is NULL. | ||
220 | Each element contains the type of chip and a list of pairs. | ||
221 | The first value is a bus number (SENSORS_ISA_BUS for the ISA bus, | ||
222 | -1 for any I2C bus), the second is the address. | ||
223 | These are automatically translated to insmod variables of the form | ||
224 | force_foo. | ||
225 | |||
226 | So we have a generic insmod variabled `force', and chip-specific variables | ||
227 | `force_CHIPNAME'. | ||
228 | |||
229 | Fortunately, as a module writer, you just have to define the `normal_i2c' | ||
230 | and `normal_isa' parameters, and define what chip names are used. | ||
231 | The complete declaration could look like this: | ||
232 | /* Scan i2c addresses 0x37, and 0x48 to 0x4f */ | ||
233 | static unsigned short normal_i2c[] = { 0x37, 0x48, 0x49, 0x4a, 0x4b, 0x4c, | ||
234 | 0x4d, 0x4e, 0x4f, I2C_CLIENT_END }; | ||
235 | /* Scan ISA address 0x290 */ | ||
236 | static unsigned int normal_isa[] = {0x0290,SENSORS_ISA_END}; | ||
237 | |||
238 | /* Define chips foo and bar, as well as all module parameters and things */ | ||
239 | SENSORS_INSMOD_2(foo,bar); | ||
240 | |||
241 | If you have one chip, you use macro SENSORS_INSMOD_1(chip), if you have 2 | ||
242 | you use macro SENSORS_INSMOD_2(chip1,chip2), etc. If you do not want to | ||
243 | bother with chip types, you can use SENSORS_INSMOD_0. | ||
244 | |||
245 | A enum is automatically defined as follows: | ||
246 | enum chips { any_chip, chip1, chip2, ... } | ||
247 | |||
248 | |||
249 | Attaching to an adapter | 206 | Attaching to an adapter |
250 | ----------------------- | 207 | ----------------------- |
251 | 208 | ||
@@ -264,17 +221,10 @@ detected at a specific address, another callback is called. | |||
264 | return i2c_probe(adapter,&addr_data,&foo_detect_client); | 221 | return i2c_probe(adapter,&addr_data,&foo_detect_client); |
265 | } | 222 | } |
266 | 223 | ||
267 | For `sensors' drivers, use the i2c_detect function instead: | ||
268 | |||
269 | int foo_attach_adapter(struct i2c_adapter *adapter) | ||
270 | { | ||
271 | return i2c_detect(adapter,&addr_data,&foo_detect_client); | ||
272 | } | ||
273 | |||
274 | Remember, structure `addr_data' is defined by the macros explained above, | 224 | Remember, structure `addr_data' is defined by the macros explained above, |
275 | so you do not have to define it yourself. | 225 | so you do not have to define it yourself. |
276 | 226 | ||
277 | The i2c_probe or i2c_detect function will call the foo_detect_client | 227 | The i2c_probe function will call the foo_detect_client |
278 | function only for those i2c addresses that actually have a device on | 228 | function only for those i2c addresses that actually have a device on |
279 | them (unless a `force' parameter was used). In addition, addresses that | 229 | them (unless a `force' parameter was used). In addition, addresses that |
280 | are already in use (by some other registered client) are skipped. | 230 | are already in use (by some other registered client) are skipped. |
@@ -283,19 +233,18 @@ are already in use (by some other registered client) are skipped. | |||
283 | The detect client function | 233 | The detect client function |
284 | -------------------------- | 234 | -------------------------- |
285 | 235 | ||
286 | The detect client function is called by i2c_probe or i2c_detect. | 236 | The detect client function is called by i2c_probe. The `kind' parameter |
287 | The `kind' parameter contains 0 if this call is due to a `force' | 237 | contains -1 for a probed detection, 0 for a forced detection, or a positive |
288 | parameter, and -1 otherwise (for i2c_detect, it contains 0 if | 238 | number for a forced detection with a chip type forced. |
289 | this call is due to the generic `force' parameter, and the chip type | ||
290 | number if it is due to a specific `force' parameter). | ||
291 | 239 | ||
292 | Below, some things are only needed if this is a `sensors' driver. Those | 240 | Below, some things are only needed if this is a `sensors' driver. Those |
293 | parts are between /* SENSORS ONLY START */ and /* SENSORS ONLY END */ | 241 | parts are between /* SENSORS ONLY START */ and /* SENSORS ONLY END */ |
294 | markers. | 242 | markers. |
295 | 243 | ||
296 | This function should only return an error (any value != 0) if there is | 244 | Returning an error different from -ENODEV in a detect function will cause |
297 | some reason why no more detection should be done anymore. If the | 245 | the detection to stop: other addresses and adapters won't be scanned. |
298 | detection just fails for this address, return 0. | 246 | This should only be done on fatal or internal errors, such as a memory |
247 | shortage or i2c_attach_client failing. | ||
299 | 248 | ||
300 | For now, you can ignore the `flags' parameter. It is there for future use. | 249 | For now, you can ignore the `flags' parameter. It is there for future use. |
301 | 250 | ||
@@ -320,11 +269,10 @@ For now, you can ignore the `flags' parameter. It is there for future use. | |||
320 | const char *type_name = ""; | 269 | const char *type_name = ""; |
321 | int is_isa = i2c_is_isa_adapter(adapter); | 270 | int is_isa = i2c_is_isa_adapter(adapter); |
322 | 271 | ||
323 | if (is_isa) { | 272 | /* Do this only if the chip can additionally be found on the ISA bus |
273 | (hybrid chip). */ | ||
324 | 274 | ||
325 | /* If this client can't be on the ISA bus at all, we can stop now | 275 | if (is_isa) { |
326 | (call `goto ERROR0'). But for kicks, we will assume it is all | ||
327 | right. */ | ||
328 | 276 | ||
329 | /* Discard immediately if this ISA range is already used */ | 277 | /* Discard immediately if this ISA range is already used */ |
330 | if (check_region(address,FOO_EXTENT)) | 278 | if (check_region(address,FOO_EXTENT)) |
@@ -495,15 +443,13 @@ much simpler than the attachment code, fortunately! | |||
495 | /* SENSORS ONLY END */ | 443 | /* SENSORS ONLY END */ |
496 | 444 | ||
497 | /* Try to detach the client from i2c space */ | 445 | /* Try to detach the client from i2c space */ |
498 | if ((err = i2c_detach_client(client))) { | 446 | if ((err = i2c_detach_client(client))) |
499 | printk("foo.o: Client deregistration failed, client not detached.\n"); | ||
500 | return err; | 447 | return err; |
501 | } | ||
502 | 448 | ||
503 | /* SENSORS ONLY START */ | 449 | /* HYBRID SENSORS CHIP ONLY START */ |
504 | if i2c_is_isa_client(client) | 450 | if i2c_is_isa_client(client) |
505 | release_region(client->addr,LM78_EXTENT); | 451 | release_region(client->addr,LM78_EXTENT); |
506 | /* SENSORS ONLY END */ | 452 | /* HYBRID SENSORS CHIP ONLY END */ |
507 | 453 | ||
508 | kfree(client); /* Frees client data too, if allocated at the same time */ | 454 | kfree(client); /* Frees client data too, if allocated at the same time */ |
509 | return 0; | 455 | return 0; |
diff --git a/Documentation/i386/boot.txt b/Documentation/i386/boot.txt index 1c48f0eba6fb..10312bebe55d 100644 --- a/Documentation/i386/boot.txt +++ b/Documentation/i386/boot.txt | |||
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ | |||
2 | ---------------------------- | 2 | ---------------------------- |
3 | 3 | ||
4 | H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> | 4 | H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> |
5 | Last update 2002-01-01 | 5 | Last update 2005-09-02 |
6 | 6 | ||
7 | On the i386 platform, the Linux kernel uses a rather complicated boot | 7 | On the i386 platform, the Linux kernel uses a rather complicated boot |
8 | convention. This has evolved partially due to historical aspects, as | 8 | convention. This has evolved partially due to historical aspects, as |
@@ -34,6 +34,8 @@ Protocol 2.02: (Kernel 2.4.0-test3-pre3) New command line protocol. | |||
34 | Protocol 2.03: (Kernel 2.4.18-pre1) Explicitly makes the highest possible | 34 | Protocol 2.03: (Kernel 2.4.18-pre1) Explicitly makes the highest possible |
35 | initrd address available to the bootloader. | 35 | initrd address available to the bootloader. |
36 | 36 | ||
37 | Protocol 2.04: (Kernel 2.6.14) Extend the syssize field to four bytes. | ||
38 | |||
37 | 39 | ||
38 | **** MEMORY LAYOUT | 40 | **** MEMORY LAYOUT |
39 | 41 | ||
@@ -103,10 +105,9 @@ The header looks like: | |||
103 | Offset Proto Name Meaning | 105 | Offset Proto Name Meaning |
104 | /Size | 106 | /Size |
105 | 107 | ||
106 | 01F1/1 ALL setup_sects The size of the setup in sectors | 108 | 01F1/1 ALL(1 setup_sects The size of the setup in sectors |
107 | 01F2/2 ALL root_flags If set, the root is mounted readonly | 109 | 01F2/2 ALL root_flags If set, the root is mounted readonly |
108 | 01F4/2 ALL syssize DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only | 110 | 01F4/4 2.04+(2 syssize The size of the 32-bit code in 16-byte paras |
109 | 01F6/2 ALL swap_dev DO NOT USE - obsolete | ||
110 | 01F8/2 ALL ram_size DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only | 111 | 01F8/2 ALL ram_size DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only |
111 | 01FA/2 ALL vid_mode Video mode control | 112 | 01FA/2 ALL vid_mode Video mode control |
112 | 01FC/2 ALL root_dev Default root device number | 113 | 01FC/2 ALL root_dev Default root device number |
@@ -129,8 +130,12 @@ Offset Proto Name Meaning | |||
129 | 0228/4 2.02+ cmd_line_ptr 32-bit pointer to the kernel command line | 130 | 0228/4 2.02+ cmd_line_ptr 32-bit pointer to the kernel command line |
130 | 022C/4 2.03+ initrd_addr_max Highest legal initrd address | 131 | 022C/4 2.03+ initrd_addr_max Highest legal initrd address |
131 | 132 | ||
132 | For backwards compatibility, if the setup_sects field contains 0, the | 133 | (1) For backwards compatibility, if the setup_sects field contains 0, the |
133 | real value is 4. | 134 | real value is 4. |
135 | |||
136 | (2) For boot protocol prior to 2.04, the upper two bytes of the syssize | ||
137 | field are unusable, which means the size of a bzImage kernel | ||
138 | cannot be determined. | ||
134 | 139 | ||
135 | If the "HdrS" (0x53726448) magic number is not found at offset 0x202, | 140 | If the "HdrS" (0x53726448) magic number is not found at offset 0x202, |
136 | the boot protocol version is "old". Loading an old kernel, the | 141 | the boot protocol version is "old". Loading an old kernel, the |
@@ -230,12 +235,16 @@ loader to communicate with the kernel. Some of its options are also | |||
230 | relevant to the boot loader itself, see "special command line options" | 235 | relevant to the boot loader itself, see "special command line options" |
231 | below. | 236 | below. |
232 | 237 | ||
233 | The kernel command line is a null-terminated string up to 255 | 238 | The kernel command line is a null-terminated string currently up to |
234 | characters long, plus the final null. | 239 | 255 characters long, plus the final null. A string that is too long |
240 | will be automatically truncated by the kernel, a boot loader may allow | ||
241 | a longer command line to be passed to permit future kernels to extend | ||
242 | this limit. | ||
235 | 243 | ||
236 | If the boot protocol version is 2.02 or later, the address of the | 244 | If the boot protocol version is 2.02 or later, the address of the |
237 | kernel command line is given by the header field cmd_line_ptr (see | 245 | kernel command line is given by the header field cmd_line_ptr (see |
238 | above.) | 246 | above.) This address can be anywhere between the end of the setup |
247 | heap and 0xA0000. | ||
239 | 248 | ||
240 | If the protocol version is *not* 2.02 or higher, the kernel | 249 | If the protocol version is *not* 2.02 or higher, the kernel |
241 | command line is entered using the following protocol: | 250 | command line is entered using the following protocol: |
@@ -255,7 +264,7 @@ command line is entered using the following protocol: | |||
255 | **** SAMPLE BOOT CONFIGURATION | 264 | **** SAMPLE BOOT CONFIGURATION |
256 | 265 | ||
257 | As a sample configuration, assume the following layout of the real | 266 | As a sample configuration, assume the following layout of the real |
258 | mode segment: | 267 | mode segment (this is a typical, and recommended layout): |
259 | 268 | ||
260 | 0x0000-0x7FFF Real mode kernel | 269 | 0x0000-0x7FFF Real mode kernel |
261 | 0x8000-0x8FFF Stack and heap | 270 | 0x8000-0x8FFF Stack and heap |
@@ -312,9 +321,9 @@ Such a boot loader should enter the following fields in the header: | |||
312 | 321 | ||
313 | **** LOADING THE REST OF THE KERNEL | 322 | **** LOADING THE REST OF THE KERNEL |
314 | 323 | ||
315 | The non-real-mode kernel starts at offset (setup_sects+1)*512 in the | 324 | The 32-bit (non-real-mode) kernel starts at offset (setup_sects+1)*512 |
316 | kernel file (again, if setup_sects == 0 the real value is 4.) It | 325 | in the kernel file (again, if setup_sects == 0 the real value is 4.) |
317 | should be loaded at address 0x10000 for Image/zImage kernels and | 326 | It should be loaded at address 0x10000 for Image/zImage kernels and |
318 | 0x100000 for bzImage kernels. | 327 | 0x100000 for bzImage kernels. |
319 | 328 | ||
320 | The kernel is a bzImage kernel if the protocol >= 2.00 and the 0x01 | 329 | The kernel is a bzImage kernel if the protocol >= 2.00 and the 0x01 |
diff --git a/Documentation/ibm-acpi.txt b/Documentation/ibm-acpi.txt index c437b1aeff55..8b3fd82b2ce7 100644 --- a/Documentation/ibm-acpi.txt +++ b/Documentation/ibm-acpi.txt | |||
@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@ | |||
1 | IBM ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver | 1 | IBM ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver |
2 | 2 | ||
3 | Version 0.8 | 3 | Version 0.12 |
4 | 8 November 2004 | 4 | 17 August 2005 |
5 | 5 | ||
6 | Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net> | 6 | Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net> |
7 | http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/ | 7 | http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/ |
8 | 8 | ||
9 | 9 | ||
10 | This is a Linux ACPI driver for the IBM ThinkPad laptops. It aims to | 10 | This is a Linux ACPI driver for the IBM ThinkPad laptops. It supports |
11 | support various features of these laptops which are accessible through | 11 | various features of these laptops which are accessible through the |
12 | the ACPI framework but not otherwise supported by the generic Linux | 12 | ACPI framework but not otherwise supported by the generic Linux ACPI |
13 | ACPI drivers. | 13 | drivers. |
14 | 14 | ||
15 | 15 | ||
16 | Status | 16 | Status |
@@ -25,9 +25,14 @@ detailed description): | |||
25 | - ThinkLight on and off | 25 | - ThinkLight on and off |
26 | - limited docking and undocking | 26 | - limited docking and undocking |
27 | - UltraBay eject | 27 | - UltraBay eject |
28 | - Experimental: CMOS control | 28 | - CMOS control |
29 | - Experimental: LED control | 29 | - LED control |
30 | - Experimental: ACPI sounds | 30 | - ACPI sounds |
31 | - temperature sensors | ||
32 | - Experimental: embedded controller register dump | ||
33 | - Experimental: LCD brightness control | ||
34 | - Experimental: volume control | ||
35 | - Experimental: fan speed, fan enable/disable | ||
31 | 36 | ||
32 | A compatibility table by model and feature is maintained on the web | 37 | A compatibility table by model and feature is maintained on the web |
33 | site, http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/. I appreciate any success or failure | 38 | site, http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/. I appreciate any success or failure |
@@ -91,12 +96,12 @@ driver is still in the alpha stage, the exact proc file format and | |||
91 | commands supported by the various features is guaranteed to change | 96 | commands supported by the various features is guaranteed to change |
92 | frequently. | 97 | frequently. |
93 | 98 | ||
94 | Driver Version -- /proc/acpi/ibm/driver | 99 | Driver version -- /proc/acpi/ibm/driver |
95 | -------------------------------------- | 100 | --------------------------------------- |
96 | 101 | ||
97 | The driver name and version. No commands can be written to this file. | 102 | The driver name and version. No commands can be written to this file. |
98 | 103 | ||
99 | Hot Keys -- /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey | 104 | Hot keys -- /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey |
100 | --------------------------------- | 105 | --------------------------------- |
101 | 106 | ||
102 | Without this driver, only the Fn-F4 key (sleep button) generates an | 107 | Without this driver, only the Fn-F4 key (sleep button) generates an |
@@ -188,7 +193,7 @@ and, on the X40, video corruption. By disabling automatic switching, | |||
188 | the flickering or video corruption can be avoided. | 193 | the flickering or video corruption can be avoided. |
189 | 194 | ||
190 | The video_switch command cycles through the available video outputs | 195 | The video_switch command cycles through the available video outputs |
191 | (it sumulates the behavior of Fn-F7). | 196 | (it simulates the behavior of Fn-F7). |
192 | 197 | ||
193 | Video expansion can be toggled through this feature. This controls | 198 | Video expansion can be toggled through this feature. This controls |
194 | whether the display is expanded to fill the entire LCD screen when a | 199 | whether the display is expanded to fill the entire LCD screen when a |
@@ -201,6 +206,12 @@ Fn-F7 from working. This also disables the video output switching | |||
201 | features of this driver, as it uses the same ACPI methods as | 206 | features of this driver, as it uses the same ACPI methods as |
202 | Fn-F7. Video switching on the console should still work. | 207 | Fn-F7. Video switching on the console should still work. |
203 | 208 | ||
209 | UPDATE: There's now a patch for the X.org Radeon driver which | ||
210 | addresses this issue. Some people are reporting success with the patch | ||
211 | while others are still having problems. For more information: | ||
212 | |||
213 | https://bugs.freedesktop.org/show_bug.cgi?id=2000 | ||
214 | |||
204 | ThinkLight control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/light | 215 | ThinkLight control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/light |
205 | ------------------------------------------ | 216 | ------------------------------------------ |
206 | 217 | ||
@@ -211,7 +222,7 @@ models which do not make the status available will show it as | |||
211 | echo on > /proc/acpi/ibm/light | 222 | echo on > /proc/acpi/ibm/light |
212 | echo off > /proc/acpi/ibm/light | 223 | echo off > /proc/acpi/ibm/light |
213 | 224 | ||
214 | Docking / Undocking -- /proc/acpi/ibm/dock | 225 | Docking / undocking -- /proc/acpi/ibm/dock |
215 | ------------------------------------------ | 226 | ------------------------------------------ |
216 | 227 | ||
217 | Docking and undocking (e.g. with the X4 UltraBase) requires some | 228 | Docking and undocking (e.g. with the X4 UltraBase) requires some |
@@ -228,11 +239,15 @@ NOTE: These events will only be generated if the laptop was docked | |||
228 | when originally booted. This is due to the current lack of support for | 239 | when originally booted. This is due to the current lack of support for |
229 | hot plugging of devices in the Linux ACPI framework. If the laptop was | 240 | hot plugging of devices in the Linux ACPI framework. If the laptop was |
230 | booted while not in the dock, the following message is shown in the | 241 | booted while not in the dock, the following message is shown in the |
231 | logs: "ibm_acpi: dock device not present". No dock-related events are | 242 | logs: |
232 | generated but the dock and undock commands described below still | 243 | |
233 | work. They can be executed manually or triggered by Fn key | 244 | Mar 17 01:42:34 aero kernel: ibm_acpi: dock device not present |
234 | combinations (see the example acpid configuration files included in | 245 | |
235 | the driver tarball package available on the web site). | 246 | In this case, no dock-related events are generated but the dock and |
247 | undock commands described below still work. They can be executed | ||
248 | manually or triggered by Fn key combinations (see the example acpid | ||
249 | configuration files included in the driver tarball package available | ||
250 | on the web site). | ||
236 | 251 | ||
237 | When the eject request button on the dock is pressed, the first event | 252 | When the eject request button on the dock is pressed, the first event |
238 | above is generated. The handler for this event should issue the | 253 | above is generated. The handler for this event should issue the |
@@ -267,7 +282,7 @@ the only docking stations currently supported are the X-series | |||
267 | UltraBase docks and "dumb" port replicators like the Mini Dock (the | 282 | UltraBase docks and "dumb" port replicators like the Mini Dock (the |
268 | latter don't need any ACPI support, actually). | 283 | latter don't need any ACPI support, actually). |
269 | 284 | ||
270 | UltraBay Eject -- /proc/acpi/ibm/bay | 285 | UltraBay eject -- /proc/acpi/ibm/bay |
271 | ------------------------------------ | 286 | ------------------------------------ |
272 | 287 | ||
273 | Inserting or ejecting an UltraBay device requires some actions to be | 288 | Inserting or ejecting an UltraBay device requires some actions to be |
@@ -284,8 +299,11 @@ when the laptop was originally booted (on the X series, the UltraBay | |||
284 | is in the dock, so it may not be present if the laptop was undocked). | 299 | is in the dock, so it may not be present if the laptop was undocked). |
285 | This is due to the current lack of support for hot plugging of devices | 300 | This is due to the current lack of support for hot plugging of devices |
286 | in the Linux ACPI framework. If the laptop was booted without the | 301 | in the Linux ACPI framework. If the laptop was booted without the |
287 | UltraBay, the following message is shown in the logs: "ibm_acpi: bay | 302 | UltraBay, the following message is shown in the logs: |
288 | device not present". No bay-related events are generated but the eject | 303 | |
304 | Mar 17 01:42:34 aero kernel: ibm_acpi: bay device not present | ||
305 | |||
306 | In this case, no bay-related events are generated but the eject | ||
289 | command described below still works. It can be executed manually or | 307 | command described below still works. It can be executed manually or |
290 | triggered by a hot key combination. | 308 | triggered by a hot key combination. |
291 | 309 | ||
@@ -306,22 +324,33 @@ necessary to enable the UltraBay device (e.g. call idectl). | |||
306 | The contents of the /proc/acpi/ibm/bay file shows the current status | 324 | The contents of the /proc/acpi/ibm/bay file shows the current status |
307 | of the UltraBay, as provided by the ACPI framework. | 325 | of the UltraBay, as provided by the ACPI framework. |
308 | 326 | ||
309 | Experimental Features | 327 | EXPERIMENTAL warm eject support on the 600e/x, A22p and A3x (To use |
310 | --------------------- | 328 | this feature, you need to supply the experimental=1 parameter when |
329 | loading the module): | ||
330 | |||
331 | These models do not have a button near the UltraBay device to request | ||
332 | a hot eject but rather require the laptop to be put to sleep | ||
333 | (suspend-to-ram) before the bay device is ejected or inserted). | ||
334 | The sequence of steps to eject the device is as follows: | ||
335 | |||
336 | echo eject > /proc/acpi/ibm/bay | ||
337 | put the ThinkPad to sleep | ||
338 | remove the drive | ||
339 | resume from sleep | ||
340 | cat /proc/acpi/ibm/bay should show that the drive was removed | ||
341 | |||
342 | On the A3x, both the UltraBay 2000 and UltraBay Plus devices are | ||
343 | supported. Use "eject2" instead of "eject" for the second bay. | ||
311 | 344 | ||
312 | The following features are marked experimental because using them | 345 | Note: the UltraBay eject support on the 600e/x, A22p and A3x is |
313 | involves guessing the correct values of some parameters. Guessing | 346 | EXPERIMENTAL and may not work as expected. USE WITH CAUTION! |
314 | incorrectly may have undesirable effects like crashing your | ||
315 | ThinkPad. USE THESE WITH CAUTION! To activate them, you'll need to | ||
316 | supply the experimental=1 parameter when loading the module. | ||
317 | 347 | ||
318 | Experimental: CMOS control - /proc/acpi/ibm/cmos | 348 | CMOS control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/cmos |
319 | ------------------------------------------------ | 349 | ----------------------------------- |
320 | 350 | ||
321 | This feature is used internally by the ACPI firmware to control the | 351 | This feature is used internally by the ACPI firmware to control the |
322 | ThinkLight on most newer ThinkPad models. It appears that it can also | 352 | ThinkLight on most newer ThinkPad models. It may also control LCD |
323 | control LCD brightness, sounds volume and more, but only on some | 353 | brightness, sounds volume and more, but only on some models. |
324 | models. | ||
325 | 354 | ||
326 | The commands are non-negative integer numbers: | 355 | The commands are non-negative integer numbers: |
327 | 356 | ||
@@ -330,10 +359,9 @@ The commands are non-negative integer numbers: | |||
330 | echo 2 >/proc/acpi/ibm/cmos | 359 | echo 2 >/proc/acpi/ibm/cmos |
331 | ... | 360 | ... |
332 | 361 | ||
333 | The range of numbers which are used internally by various models is 0 | 362 | The range of valid numbers is 0 to 21, but not all have an effect and |
334 | to 21, but it's possible that numbers outside this range have | 363 | the behavior varies from model to model. Here is the behavior on the |
335 | interesting behavior. Here is the behavior on the X40 (tpb is the | 364 | X40 (tpb is the ThinkPad Buttons utility): |
336 | ThinkPad Buttons utility): | ||
337 | 365 | ||
338 | 0 - no effect but tpb reports "Volume down" | 366 | 0 - no effect but tpb reports "Volume down" |
339 | 1 - no effect but tpb reports "Volume up" | 367 | 1 - no effect but tpb reports "Volume up" |
@@ -346,26 +374,18 @@ ThinkPad Buttons utility): | |||
346 | 13 - ThinkLight off | 374 | 13 - ThinkLight off |
347 | 14 - no effect but tpb reports ThinkLight status change | 375 | 14 - no effect but tpb reports ThinkLight status change |
348 | 376 | ||
349 | If you try this feature, please send me a report similar to the | 377 | LED control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/led |
350 | above. On models which allow control of LCD brightness or sound | 378 | --------------------------------- |
351 | volume, I'd like to provide this functionality in an user-friendly | ||
352 | way, but first I need a way to identify the models which this is | ||
353 | possible. | ||
354 | |||
355 | Experimental: LED control - /proc/acpi/ibm/LED | ||
356 | ---------------------------------------------- | ||
357 | 379 | ||
358 | Some of the LED indicators can be controlled through this feature. The | 380 | Some of the LED indicators can be controlled through this feature. The |
359 | available commands are: | 381 | available commands are: |
360 | 382 | ||
361 | echo <led number> on >/proc/acpi/ibm/led | 383 | echo '<led number> on' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led |
362 | echo <led number> off >/proc/acpi/ibm/led | 384 | echo '<led number> off' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led |
363 | echo <led number> blink >/proc/acpi/ibm/led | 385 | echo '<led number> blink' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led |
364 | 386 | ||
365 | The <led number> parameter is a non-negative integer. The range of LED | 387 | The <led number> range is 0 to 7. The set of LEDs that can be |
366 | numbers used internally by various models is 0 to 7 but it's possible | 388 | controlled varies from model to model. Here is the mapping on the X40: |
367 | that numbers outside this range are also valid. Here is the mapping on | ||
368 | the X40: | ||
369 | 389 | ||
370 | 0 - power | 390 | 0 - power |
371 | 1 - battery (orange) | 391 | 1 - battery (orange) |
@@ -376,49 +396,224 @@ the X40: | |||
376 | 396 | ||
377 | All of the above can be turned on and off and can be made to blink. | 397 | All of the above can be turned on and off and can be made to blink. |
378 | 398 | ||
379 | If you try this feature, please send me a report similar to the | 399 | ACPI sounds -- /proc/acpi/ibm/beep |
380 | above. I'd like to provide this functionality in an user-friendly way, | 400 | ---------------------------------- |
381 | but first I need to identify the which numbers correspond to which | ||
382 | LEDs on various models. | ||
383 | |||
384 | Experimental: ACPI sounds - /proc/acpi/ibm/beep | ||
385 | ----------------------------------------------- | ||
386 | 401 | ||
387 | The BEEP method is used internally by the ACPI firmware to provide | 402 | The BEEP method is used internally by the ACPI firmware to provide |
388 | audible alerts in various situtation. This feature allows the same | 403 | audible alerts in various situations. This feature allows the same |
389 | sounds to be triggered manually. | 404 | sounds to be triggered manually. |
390 | 405 | ||
391 | The commands are non-negative integer numbers: | 406 | The commands are non-negative integer numbers: |
392 | 407 | ||
393 | echo 0 >/proc/acpi/ibm/beep | 408 | echo <number> >/proc/acpi/ibm/beep |
394 | echo 1 >/proc/acpi/ibm/beep | ||
395 | echo 2 >/proc/acpi/ibm/beep | ||
396 | ... | ||
397 | 409 | ||
398 | The range of numbers which are used internally by various models is 0 | 410 | The valid <number> range is 0 to 17. Not all numbers trigger sounds |
399 | to 17, but it's possible that numbers outside this range are also | 411 | and the sounds vary from model to model. Here is the behavior on the |
400 | valid. Here is the behavior on the X40: | 412 | X40: |
401 | 413 | ||
402 | 2 - two beeps, pause, third beep | 414 | 0 - stop a sound in progress (but use 17 to stop 16) |
415 | 2 - two beeps, pause, third beep ("low battery") | ||
403 | 3 - single beep | 416 | 3 - single beep |
404 | 4 - "unable" | 417 | 4 - high, followed by low-pitched beep ("unable") |
405 | 5 - single beep | 418 | 5 - single beep |
406 | 6 - "AC/DC" | 419 | 6 - very high, followed by high-pitched beep ("AC/DC") |
407 | 7 - high-pitched beep | 420 | 7 - high-pitched beep |
408 | 9 - three short beeps | 421 | 9 - three short beeps |
409 | 10 - very long beep | 422 | 10 - very long beep |
410 | 12 - low-pitched beep | 423 | 12 - low-pitched beep |
424 | 15 - three high-pitched beeps repeating constantly, stop with 0 | ||
425 | 16 - one medium-pitched beep repeating constantly, stop with 17 | ||
426 | 17 - stop 16 | ||
427 | |||
428 | Temperature sensors -- /proc/acpi/ibm/thermal | ||
429 | --------------------------------------------- | ||
430 | |||
431 | Most ThinkPads include six or more separate temperature sensors but | ||
432 | only expose the CPU temperature through the standard ACPI methods. | ||
433 | This feature shows readings from up to eight different sensors. Some | ||
434 | readings may not be valid, e.g. may show large negative values. For | ||
435 | example, on the X40, a typical output may be: | ||
436 | |||
437 | temperatures: 42 42 45 41 36 -128 33 -128 | ||
438 | |||
439 | Thomas Gruber took his R51 apart and traced all six active sensors in | ||
440 | his laptop (the location of sensors may vary on other models): | ||
441 | |||
442 | 1: CPU | ||
443 | 2: Mini PCI Module | ||
444 | 3: HDD | ||
445 | 4: GPU | ||
446 | 5: Battery | ||
447 | 6: N/A | ||
448 | 7: Battery | ||
449 | 8: N/A | ||
450 | |||
451 | No commands can be written to this file. | ||
452 | |||
453 | EXPERIMENTAL: Embedded controller reigster dump -- /proc/acpi/ibm/ecdump | ||
454 | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ||
455 | |||
456 | This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation | ||
457 | directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE | ||
458 | WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the | ||
459 | experimental=1 parameter when loading the module. | ||
460 | |||
461 | This feature dumps the values of 256 embedded controller | ||
462 | registers. Values which have changed since the last time the registers | ||
463 | were dumped are marked with a star: | ||
464 | |||
465 | [root@x40 ibm-acpi]# cat /proc/acpi/ibm/ecdump | ||
466 | EC +00 +01 +02 +03 +04 +05 +06 +07 +08 +09 +0a +0b +0c +0d +0e +0f | ||
467 | EC 0x00: a7 47 87 01 fe 96 00 08 01 00 cb 00 00 00 40 00 | ||
468 | EC 0x10: 00 00 ff ff f4 3c 87 09 01 ff 42 01 ff ff 0d 00 | ||
469 | EC 0x20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 43 00 00 80 | ||
470 | EC 0x30: 01 07 1a 00 30 04 00 00 *85 00 00 10 00 50 00 00 | ||
471 | EC 0x40: 00 00 00 00 00 00 14 01 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 | ||
472 | EC 0x50: 00 c0 02 0d 00 01 01 02 02 03 03 03 03 *bc *02 *bc | ||
473 | EC 0x60: *02 *bc *02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 | ||
474 | EC 0x70: 00 00 00 00 00 12 30 40 *24 *26 *2c *27 *20 80 *1f 80 | ||
475 | EC 0x80: 00 00 00 06 *37 *0e 03 00 00 00 0e 07 00 00 00 00 | ||
476 | EC 0x90: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 | ||
477 | EC 0xa0: *ff 09 ff 09 ff ff *64 00 *00 *00 *a2 41 *ff *ff *e0 00 | ||
478 | EC 0xb0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 | ||
479 | EC 0xc0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 | ||
480 | EC 0xd0: 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 | ||
481 | EC 0xe0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 20 49 04 24 06 55 03 | ||
482 | EC 0xf0: 31 55 48 54 35 38 57 57 08 2f 45 73 07 65 6c 1a | ||
483 | |||
484 | This feature can be used to determine the register holding the fan | ||
485 | speed on some models. To do that, do the following: | ||
486 | |||
487 | - make sure the battery is fully charged | ||
488 | - make sure the fan is running | ||
489 | - run 'cat /proc/acpi/ibm/ecdump' several times, once per second or so | ||
490 | |||
491 | The first step makes sure various charging-related values don't | ||
492 | vary. The second ensures that the fan-related values do vary, since | ||
493 | the fan speed fluctuates a bit. The third will (hopefully) mark the | ||
494 | fan register with a star: | ||
495 | |||
496 | [root@x40 ibm-acpi]# cat /proc/acpi/ibm/ecdump | ||
497 | EC +00 +01 +02 +03 +04 +05 +06 +07 +08 +09 +0a +0b +0c +0d +0e +0f | ||
498 | EC 0x00: a7 47 87 01 fe 96 00 08 01 00 cb 00 00 00 40 00 | ||
499 | EC 0x10: 00 00 ff ff f4 3c 87 09 01 ff 42 01 ff ff 0d 00 | ||
500 | EC 0x20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 43 00 00 80 | ||
501 | EC 0x30: 01 07 1a 00 30 04 00 00 85 00 00 10 00 50 00 00 | ||
502 | EC 0x40: 00 00 00 00 00 00 14 01 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 | ||
503 | EC 0x50: 00 c0 02 0d 00 01 01 02 02 03 03 03 03 bc 02 bc | ||
504 | EC 0x60: 02 bc 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 | ||
505 | EC 0x70: 00 00 00 00 00 12 30 40 24 27 2c 27 21 80 1f 80 | ||
506 | EC 0x80: 00 00 00 06 *be 0d 03 00 00 00 0e 07 00 00 00 00 | ||
507 | EC 0x90: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 | ||
508 | EC 0xa0: ff 09 ff 09 ff ff 64 00 00 00 a2 41 ff ff e0 00 | ||
509 | EC 0xb0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 | ||
510 | EC 0xc0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 | ||
511 | EC 0xd0: 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 | ||
512 | EC 0xe0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 20 49 04 24 06 55 03 | ||
513 | EC 0xf0: 31 55 48 54 35 38 57 57 08 2f 45 73 07 65 6c 1a | ||
514 | |||
515 | Another set of values that varies often is the temperature | ||
516 | readings. Since temperatures don't change vary fast, you can take | ||
517 | several quick dumps to eliminate them. | ||
518 | |||
519 | You can use a similar method to figure out the meaning of other | ||
520 | embedded controller registers - e.g. make sure nothing else changes | ||
521 | except the charging or discharging battery to determine which | ||
522 | registers contain the current battery capacity, etc. If you experiment | ||
523 | with this, do send me your results (including some complete dumps with | ||
524 | a description of the conditions when they were taken.) | ||
525 | |||
526 | EXPERIMENTAL: LCD brightness control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/brightness | ||
527 | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | ||
528 | |||
529 | This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation | ||
530 | directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE | ||
531 | WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the | ||
532 | experimental=1 parameter when loading the module. | ||
533 | |||
534 | This feature allows software control of the LCD brightness on ThinkPad | ||
535 | models which don't have a hardware brightness slider. The available | ||
536 | commands are: | ||
537 | |||
538 | echo up >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness | ||
539 | echo down >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness | ||
540 | echo 'level <level>' >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness | ||
541 | |||
542 | The <level> number range is 0 to 7, although not all of them may be | ||
543 | distinct. The current brightness level is shown in the file. | ||
544 | |||
545 | EXPERIMENTAL: Volume control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/volume | ||
546 | ----------------------------------------------------- | ||
547 | |||
548 | This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation | ||
549 | directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE | ||
550 | WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the | ||
551 | experimental=1 parameter when loading the module. | ||
552 | |||
553 | This feature allows volume control on ThinkPad models which don't have | ||
554 | a hardware volume knob. The available commands are: | ||
555 | |||
556 | echo up >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume | ||
557 | echo down >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume | ||
558 | echo mute >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume | ||
559 | echo 'level <level>' >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume | ||
560 | |||
561 | The <level> number range is 0 to 15 although not all of them may be | ||
562 | distinct. The unmute the volume after the mute command, use either the | ||
563 | up or down command (the level command will not unmute the volume). | ||
564 | The current volume level and mute state is shown in the file. | ||
565 | |||
566 | EXPERIMENTAL: fan speed, fan enable/disable -- /proc/acpi/ibm/fan | ||
567 | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | ||
568 | |||
569 | This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation | ||
570 | directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE | ||
571 | WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the | ||
572 | experimental=1 parameter when loading the module. | ||
573 | |||
574 | This feature attempts to show the current fan speed. The speed is read | ||
575 | directly from the hardware registers of the embedded controller. This | ||
576 | is known to work on later R, T and X series ThinkPads but may show a | ||
577 | bogus value on other models. | ||
578 | |||
579 | The fan may be enabled or disabled with the following commands: | ||
580 | |||
581 | echo enable >/proc/acpi/ibm/fan | ||
582 | echo disable >/proc/acpi/ibm/fan | ||
583 | |||
584 | WARNING WARNING WARNING: do not leave the fan disabled unless you are | ||
585 | monitoring the temperature sensor readings and you are ready to enable | ||
586 | it if necessary to avoid overheating. | ||
587 | |||
588 | The fan only runs if it's enabled *and* the various temperature | ||
589 | sensors which control it read high enough. On the X40, this seems to | ||
590 | depend on the CPU and HDD temperatures. Specifically, the fan is | ||
591 | turned on when either the CPU temperature climbs to 56 degrees or the | ||
592 | HDD temperature climbs to 46 degrees. The fan is turned off when the | ||
593 | CPU temperature drops to 49 degrees and the HDD temperature drops to | ||
594 | 41 degrees. These thresholds cannot currently be controlled. | ||
595 | |||
596 | On the X31 and X40 (and ONLY on those models), the fan speed can be | ||
597 | controlled to a certain degree. Once the fan is running, it can be | ||
598 | forced to run faster or slower with the following command: | ||
599 | |||
600 | echo 'speed <speed>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/thermal | ||
601 | |||
602 | The sustainable range of fan speeds on the X40 appears to be from | ||
603 | about 3700 to about 7350. Values outside this range either do not have | ||
604 | any effect or the fan speed eventually settles somewhere in that | ||
605 | range. The fan cannot be stopped or started with this command. | ||
606 | |||
607 | On the 570, temperature readings are not available through this | ||
608 | feature and the fan control works a little differently. The fan speed | ||
609 | is reported in levels from 0 (off) to 7 (max) and can be controlled | ||
610 | with the following command: | ||
411 | 611 | ||
412 | (I've only been able to identify a couple of them). | 612 | echo 'level <level>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/thermal |
413 | |||
414 | If you try this feature, please send me a report similar to the | ||
415 | above. I'd like to provide this functionality in an user-friendly way, | ||
416 | but first I need to identify the which numbers correspond to which | ||
417 | sounds on various models. | ||
418 | 613 | ||
419 | 614 | ||
420 | Multiple Command, Module Parameters | 615 | Multiple Commands, Module Parameters |
421 | ----------------------------------- | 616 | ------------------------------------ |
422 | 617 | ||
423 | Multiple commands can be written to the proc files in one shot by | 618 | Multiple commands can be written to the proc files in one shot by |
424 | separating them with commas, for example: | 619 | separating them with commas, for example: |
@@ -451,24 +646,19 @@ scripts (included with ibm-acpi for completeness): | |||
451 | /usr/local/sbin/laptop_mode -- from the Linux kernel source | 646 | /usr/local/sbin/laptop_mode -- from the Linux kernel source |
452 | distribution, see Documentation/laptop-mode.txt | 647 | distribution, see Documentation/laptop-mode.txt |
453 | /sbin/service -- comes with Redhat/Fedora distributions | 648 | /sbin/service -- comes with Redhat/Fedora distributions |
649 | /usr/sbin/hibernate -- from the Software Suspend 2 distribution, | ||
650 | see http://softwaresuspend.berlios.de/ | ||
454 | 651 | ||
455 | Toan T Nguyen <ntt@control.uchicago.edu> has written a SuSE powersave | 652 | Toan T Nguyen <ntt@physics.ucla.edu> notes that Suse uses the |
456 | script for the X20, included in config/usr/sbin/ibm_hotkeys_X20 | 653 | powersave program to suspend ('powersave --suspend-to-ram') or |
654 | hibernate ('powersave --suspend-to-disk'). This means that the | ||
655 | hibernate script is not needed on that distribution. | ||
457 | 656 | ||
458 | Henrik Brix Andersen <brix@gentoo.org> has written a Gentoo ACPI event | 657 | Henrik Brix Andersen <brix@gentoo.org> has written a Gentoo ACPI event |
459 | handler script for the X31. You can get the latest version from | 658 | handler script for the X31. You can get the latest version from |
460 | http://dev.gentoo.org/~brix/files/x31.sh | 659 | http://dev.gentoo.org/~brix/files/x31.sh |
461 | 660 | ||
462 | David Schweikert <dws@ee.eth.ch> has written an alternative blank.sh | 661 | David Schweikert <dws@ee.eth.ch> has written an alternative blank.sh |
463 | script which works on Debian systems, included in | 662 | script which works on Debian systems. This scripts has now been |
464 | configs/etc/acpi/actions/blank-debian.sh | 663 | extended to also work on Fedora systems and included as the default |
465 | 664 | blank.sh in the distribution. | |
466 | |||
467 | TODO | ||
468 | ---- | ||
469 | |||
470 | I'd like to implement the following features but haven't yet found the | ||
471 | time and/or I don't yet know how to implement them: | ||
472 | |||
473 | - UltraBay floppy drive support | ||
474 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/input/yealink.txt b/Documentation/input/yealink.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..85f095a7ad04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/input/yealink.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,203 @@ | |||
1 | Driver documentation for yealink usb-p1k phones | ||
2 | |||
3 | 0. Status | ||
4 | ~~~~~~~~~ | ||
5 | |||
6 | The p1k is a relatively cheap usb 1.1 phone with: | ||
7 | - keyboard full support, yealink.ko / input event API | ||
8 | - LCD full support, yealink.ko / sysfs API | ||
9 | - LED full support, yealink.ko / sysfs API | ||
10 | - dialtone full support, yealink.ko / sysfs API | ||
11 | - ringtone full support, yealink.ko / sysfs API | ||
12 | - audio playback full support, snd_usb_audio.ko / alsa API | ||
13 | - audio record full support, snd_usb_audio.ko / alsa API | ||
14 | |||
15 | For vendor documentation see http://www.yealink.com | ||
16 | |||
17 | |||
18 | 1. Compilation (stand alone version) | ||
19 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
20 | |||
21 | Currently only kernel 2.6.x.y versions are supported. | ||
22 | In order to build the yealink.ko module do: | ||
23 | |||
24 | make | ||
25 | |||
26 | If you encounter problems please check if in the MAKE_OPTS variable in | ||
27 | the Makefile is pointing to the location where your kernel sources | ||
28 | are located, default /usr/src/linux. | ||
29 | |||
30 | |||
31 | |||
32 | 2. keyboard features | ||
33 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
34 | The current mapping in the kernel is provided by the map_p1k_to_key | ||
35 | function: | ||
36 | |||
37 | Physical USB-P1K button layout input events | ||
38 | |||
39 | |||
40 | up up | ||
41 | IN OUT left, right | ||
42 | down down | ||
43 | |||
44 | pickup C hangup enter, backspace, escape | ||
45 | 1 2 3 1, 2, 3 | ||
46 | 4 5 6 4, 5, 6, | ||
47 | 7 8 9 7, 8, 9, | ||
48 | * 0 # *, 0, #, | ||
49 | |||
50 | The "up" and "down" keys, are symbolised by arrows on the button. | ||
51 | The "pickup" and "hangup" keys are symbolised by a green and red phone | ||
52 | on the button. | ||
53 | |||
54 | |||
55 | 3. LCD features | ||
56 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
57 | The LCD is divided and organised as a 3 line display: | ||
58 | |||
59 | |[] [][] [][] [][] in |[][] | ||
60 | |[] M [][] D [][] : [][] out |[][] | ||
61 | store | ||
62 | |||
63 | NEW REP SU MO TU WE TH FR SA | ||
64 | |||
65 | [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] | ||
66 | [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] | ||
67 | |||
68 | |||
69 | Line 1 Format (see below) : 18.e8.M8.88...188 | ||
70 | Icon names : M D : IN OUT STORE | ||
71 | Line 2 Format : ......... | ||
72 | Icon name : NEW REP SU MO TU WE TH FR SA | ||
73 | Line 3 Format : 888888888888 | ||
74 | |||
75 | |||
76 | Format description: | ||
77 | From a user space perspective the world is seperated in "digits" and "icons". | ||
78 | A digit can have a character set, an icon can only be ON or OFF. | ||
79 | |||
80 | Format specifier | ||
81 | '8' : Generic 7 segment digit with individual addressable segments | ||
82 | |||
83 | Reduced capabillity 7 segm digit, when segments are hard wired together. | ||
84 | '1' : 2 segments digit only able to produce a 1. | ||
85 | 'e' : Most significant day of the month digit, | ||
86 | able to produce at least 1 2 3. | ||
87 | 'M' : Most significant minute digit, | ||
88 | able to produce at least 0 1 2 3 4 5. | ||
89 | |||
90 | Icons or pictograms: | ||
91 | '.' : For example like AM, PM, SU, a 'dot' .. or other single segment | ||
92 | elements. | ||
93 | |||
94 | |||
95 | 4. Driver usage | ||
96 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
97 | For userland the following interfaces are available using the sysfs interface: | ||
98 | /sys/.../ | ||
99 | line1 Read/Write, lcd line1 | ||
100 | line2 Read/Write, lcd line2 | ||
101 | line3 Read/Write, lcd line3 | ||
102 | |||
103 | get_icons Read, returns a set of available icons. | ||
104 | hide_icon Write, hide the element by writing the icon name. | ||
105 | show_icon Write, display the element by writing the icon name. | ||
106 | |||
107 | map_seg7 Read/Write, the 7 segments char set, common for all | ||
108 | yealink phones. (see map_to_7segment.h) | ||
109 | |||
110 | ringtone Write, upload binary representation of a ringtone, | ||
111 | see yealink.c. status EXPERIMENTAL due to potential | ||
112 | races between async. and sync usb calls. | ||
113 | |||
114 | |||
115 | 4.1 lineX | ||
116 | ~~~~~~~~~ | ||
117 | Reading /sys/../lineX will return the format string with its current value: | ||
118 | |||
119 | Example: | ||
120 | cat ./line3 | ||
121 | 888888888888 | ||
122 | Linux Rocks! | ||
123 | |||
124 | Writing to /sys/../lineX will set the coresponding LCD line. | ||
125 | - Excess characters are ignored. | ||
126 | - If less characters are written than allowed, the remaining digits are | ||
127 | unchanged. | ||
128 | - The tab '\t'and '\n' char does not overwrite the original content. | ||
129 | - Writing a space to an icon will always hide its content. | ||
130 | |||
131 | Example: | ||
132 | date +"%m.%e.%k:%M" | sed 's/^0/ /' > ./line1 | ||
133 | |||
134 | Will update the LCD with the current date & time. | ||
135 | |||
136 | |||
137 | 4.2 get_icons | ||
138 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
139 | Reading will return all available icon names and its current settings: | ||
140 | |||
141 | cat ./get_icons | ||
142 | on M | ||
143 | on D | ||
144 | on : | ||
145 | IN | ||
146 | OUT | ||
147 | STORE | ||
148 | NEW | ||
149 | REP | ||
150 | SU | ||
151 | MO | ||
152 | TU | ||
153 | WE | ||
154 | TH | ||
155 | FR | ||
156 | SA | ||
157 | LED | ||
158 | DIALTONE | ||
159 | RINGTONE | ||
160 | |||
161 | |||
162 | 4.3 show/hide icons | ||
163 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
164 | Writing to these files will update the state of the icon. | ||
165 | Only one icon at a time can be updated. | ||
166 | |||
167 | If an icon is also on a ./lineX the corresponding value is | ||
168 | updated with the first letter of the icon. | ||
169 | |||
170 | Example - light up the store icon: | ||
171 | echo -n "STORE" > ./show_icon | ||
172 | |||
173 | cat ./line1 | ||
174 | 18.e8.M8.88...188 | ||
175 | S | ||
176 | |||
177 | Example - sound the ringtone for 10 seconds: | ||
178 | echo -n RINGTONE > /sys/..../show_icon | ||
179 | sleep 10 | ||
180 | echo -n RINGTONE > /sys/..../hide_icon | ||
181 | |||
182 | |||
183 | 5. Sound features | ||
184 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
185 | Sound is supported by the ALSA driver: snd_usb_audio | ||
186 | |||
187 | One 16-bit channel with sample and playback rates of 8000 Hz is the practical | ||
188 | limit of the device. | ||
189 | |||
190 | Example - recording test: | ||
191 | arecord -v -d 10 -r 8000 -f S16_LE -t wav foobar.wav | ||
192 | |||
193 | Example - playback test: | ||
194 | aplay foobar.wav | ||
195 | |||
196 | |||
197 | 6. Credits & Acknowledgments | ||
198 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
199 | - Olivier Vandorpe, for starting the usbb2k-api project doing much of | ||
200 | the reverse engineering. | ||
201 | - Martin Diehl, for pointing out how to handle USB memory allocation. | ||
202 | - Dmitry Torokhov, for the numerous code reviews and suggestions. | ||
203 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt index 2616a58a5a4b..9a1586590d82 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt | |||
@@ -872,7 +872,13 @@ When kbuild executes the following steps are followed (roughly): | |||
872 | Assignments to $(targets) are without $(obj)/ prefix. | 872 | Assignments to $(targets) are without $(obj)/ prefix. |
873 | if_changed may be used in conjunction with custom commands as | 873 | if_changed may be used in conjunction with custom commands as |
874 | defined in 6.7 "Custom kbuild commands". | 874 | defined in 6.7 "Custom kbuild commands". |
875 | |||
875 | Note: It is a typical mistake to forget the FORCE prerequisite. | 876 | Note: It is a typical mistake to forget the FORCE prerequisite. |
877 | Another common pitfall is that whitespace is sometimes | ||
878 | significant; for instance, the below will fail (note the extra space | ||
879 | after the comma): | ||
880 | target: source(s) FORCE | ||
881 | #WRONG!# $(call if_changed, ld/objcopy/gzip) | ||
876 | 882 | ||
877 | ld | 883 | ld |
878 | Link target. Often LDFLAGS_$@ is used to set specific options to ld. | 884 | Link target. Often LDFLAGS_$@ is used to set specific options to ld. |
diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt index 7ff213f4becd..1f5f7d28c9e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt +++ b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt | |||
@@ -39,8 +39,7 @@ SETUP | |||
39 | and apply http://lse.sourceforge.net/kdump/patches/kexec-tools-1.101-kdump.patch | 39 | and apply http://lse.sourceforge.net/kdump/patches/kexec-tools-1.101-kdump.patch |
40 | and after that build the source. | 40 | and after that build the source. |
41 | 41 | ||
42 | 2) Download and build the appropriate (latest) kexec/kdump (-mm) kernel | 42 | 2) Download and build the appropriate (2.6.13-rc1 onwards) vanilla kernel. |
43 | patchset and apply it to the vanilla kernel tree. | ||
44 | 43 | ||
45 | Two kernels need to be built in order to get this feature working. | 44 | Two kernels need to be built in order to get this feature working. |
46 | 45 | ||
@@ -84,15 +83,16 @@ SETUP | |||
84 | 83 | ||
85 | 4) Load the second kernel to be booted using: | 84 | 4) Load the second kernel to be booted using: |
86 | 85 | ||
87 | kexec -p <second-kernel> --crash-dump --args-linux --append="root=<root-dev> | 86 | kexec -p <second-kernel> --args-linux --elf32-core-headers |
88 | init 1 irqpoll" | 87 | --append="root=<root-dev> init 1 irqpoll" |
89 | 88 | ||
90 | Note: i) <second-kernel> has to be a vmlinux image. bzImage will not work, | 89 | Note: i) <second-kernel> has to be a vmlinux image. bzImage will not work, |
91 | as of now. | 90 | as of now. |
92 | ii) By default ELF headers are stored in ELF32 format (for i386). This | 91 | ii) By default ELF headers are stored in ELF64 format. Option |
93 | is sufficient to represent the physical memory up to 4GB. To store | 92 | --elf32-core-headers forces generation of ELF32 headers. gdb can |
94 | headers in ELF64 format, specifiy "--elf64-core-headers" on the | 93 | not open ELF64 headers on 32 bit systems. So creating ELF32 |
95 | kexec command line additionally. | 94 | headers can come handy for users who have got non-PAE systems and |
95 | hence have memory less than 4GB. | ||
96 | iii) Specify "irqpoll" as command line parameter. This reduces driver | 96 | iii) Specify "irqpoll" as command line parameter. This reduces driver |
97 | initialization failures in second kernel due to shared interrupts. | 97 | initialization failures in second kernel due to shared interrupts. |
98 | 98 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 111e98056195..db2603ceabba 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | |||
@@ -1175,6 +1175,11 @@ running once the system is up. | |||
1175 | New name for the ramdisk parameter. | 1175 | New name for the ramdisk parameter. |
1176 | See Documentation/ramdisk.txt. | 1176 | See Documentation/ramdisk.txt. |
1177 | 1177 | ||
1178 | rdinit= [KNL] | ||
1179 | Format: <full_path> | ||
1180 | Run specified binary instead of /init from the ramdisk, | ||
1181 | used for early userspace startup. See initrd. | ||
1182 | |||
1178 | reboot= [BUGS=IA-32,BUGS=ARM,BUGS=IA-64] Rebooting mode | 1183 | reboot= [BUGS=IA-32,BUGS=ARM,BUGS=IA-64] Rebooting mode |
1179 | Format: <reboot_mode>[,<reboot_mode2>[,...]] | 1184 | Format: <reboot_mode>[,<reboot_mode2>[,...]] |
1180 | See arch/*/kernel/reboot.c. | 1185 | See arch/*/kernel/reboot.c. |
diff --git a/Documentation/power/swsusp-dmcrypt.txt b/Documentation/power/swsusp-dmcrypt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..59931b46ff7e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/swsusp-dmcrypt.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ | |||
1 | Author: Andreas Steinmetz <ast@domdv.de> | ||
2 | |||
3 | |||
4 | How to use dm-crypt and swsusp together: | ||
5 | ======================================== | ||
6 | |||
7 | Some prerequisites: | ||
8 | You know how dm-crypt works. If not, visit the following web page: | ||
9 | http://www.saout.de/misc/dm-crypt/ | ||
10 | You have read Documentation/power/swsusp.txt and understand it. | ||
11 | You did read Documentation/initrd.txt and know how an initrd works. | ||
12 | You know how to create or how to modify an initrd. | ||
13 | |||
14 | Now your system is properly set up, your disk is encrypted except for | ||
15 | the swap device(s) and the boot partition which may contain a mini | ||
16 | system for crypto setup and/or rescue purposes. You may even have | ||
17 | an initrd that does your current crypto setup already. | ||
18 | |||
19 | At this point you want to encrypt your swap, too. Still you want to | ||
20 | be able to suspend using swsusp. This, however, means that you | ||
21 | have to be able to either enter a passphrase or that you read | ||
22 | the key(s) from an external device like a pcmcia flash disk | ||
23 | or an usb stick prior to resume. So you need an initrd, that sets | ||
24 | up dm-crypt and then asks swsusp to resume from the encrypted | ||
25 | swap device. | ||
26 | |||
27 | The most important thing is that you set up dm-crypt in such | ||
28 | a way that the swap device you suspend to/resume from has | ||
29 | always the same major/minor within the initrd as well as | ||
30 | within your running system. The easiest way to achieve this is | ||
31 | to always set up this swap device first with dmsetup, so that | ||
32 | it will always look like the following: | ||
33 | |||
34 | brw------- 1 root root 254, 0 Jul 28 13:37 /dev/mapper/swap0 | ||
35 | |||
36 | Now set up your kernel to use /dev/mapper/swap0 as the default | ||
37 | resume partition, so your kernel .config contains: | ||
38 | |||
39 | CONFIG_PM_STD_PARTITION="/dev/mapper/swap0" | ||
40 | |||
41 | Prepare your boot loader to use the initrd you will create or | ||
42 | modify. For lilo the simplest setup looks like the following | ||
43 | lines: | ||
44 | |||
45 | image=/boot/vmlinuz | ||
46 | initrd=/boot/initrd.gz | ||
47 | label=linux | ||
48 | append="root=/dev/ram0 init=/linuxrc rw" | ||
49 | |||
50 | Finally you need to create or modify your initrd. Lets assume | ||
51 | you create an initrd that reads the required dm-crypt setup | ||
52 | from a pcmcia flash disk card. The card is formatted with an ext2 | ||
53 | fs which resides on /dev/hde1 when the card is inserted. The | ||
54 | card contains at least the encrypted swap setup in a file | ||
55 | named "swapkey". /etc/fstab of your initrd contains something | ||
56 | like the following: | ||
57 | |||
58 | /dev/hda1 /mnt ext3 ro 0 0 | ||
59 | none /proc proc defaults,noatime,nodiratime 0 0 | ||
60 | none /sys sysfs defaults,noatime,nodiratime 0 0 | ||
61 | |||
62 | /dev/hda1 contains an unencrypted mini system that sets up all | ||
63 | of your crypto devices, again by reading the setup from the | ||
64 | pcmcia flash disk. What follows now is a /linuxrc for your | ||
65 | initrd that allows you to resume from encrypted swap and that | ||
66 | continues boot with your mini system on /dev/hda1 if resume | ||
67 | does not happen: | ||
68 | |||
69 | #!/bin/sh | ||
70 | PATH=/sbin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin | ||
71 | mount /proc | ||
72 | mount /sys | ||
73 | mapped=0 | ||
74 | noresume=`grep -c noresume /proc/cmdline` | ||
75 | if [ "$*" != "" ] | ||
76 | then | ||
77 | noresume=1 | ||
78 | fi | ||
79 | dmesg -n 1 | ||
80 | /sbin/cardmgr -q | ||
81 | for i in 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 | ||
82 | do | ||
83 | if [ -f /proc/ide/hde/media ] | ||
84 | then | ||
85 | usleep 500000 | ||
86 | mount -t ext2 -o ro /dev/hde1 /mnt | ||
87 | if [ -f /mnt/swapkey ] | ||
88 | then | ||
89 | dmsetup create swap0 /mnt/swapkey > /dev/null 2>&1 && mapped=1 | ||
90 | fi | ||
91 | umount /mnt | ||
92 | break | ||
93 | fi | ||
94 | usleep 500000 | ||
95 | done | ||
96 | killproc /sbin/cardmgr | ||
97 | dmesg -n 6 | ||
98 | if [ $mapped = 1 ] | ||
99 | then | ||
100 | if [ $noresume != 0 ] | ||
101 | then | ||
102 | mkswap /dev/mapper/swap0 > /dev/null 2>&1 | ||
103 | fi | ||
104 | echo 254:0 > /sys/power/resume | ||
105 | dmsetup remove swap0 | ||
106 | fi | ||
107 | umount /sys | ||
108 | mount /mnt | ||
109 | umount /proc | ||
110 | cd /mnt | ||
111 | pivot_root . mnt | ||
112 | mount /proc | ||
113 | umount -l /mnt | ||
114 | umount /proc | ||
115 | exec chroot . /sbin/init $* < dev/console > dev/console 2>&1 | ||
116 | |||
117 | Please don't mind the weird loop above, busybox's msh doesn't know | ||
118 | the let statement. Now, what is happening in the script? | ||
119 | First we have to decide if we want to try to resume, or not. | ||
120 | We will not resume if booting with "noresume" or any parameters | ||
121 | for init like "single" or "emergency" as boot parameters. | ||
122 | |||
123 | Then we need to set up dmcrypt with the setup data from the | ||
124 | pcmcia flash disk. If this succeeds we need to reset the swap | ||
125 | device if we don't want to resume. The line "echo 254:0 > /sys/power/resume" | ||
126 | then attempts to resume from the first device mapper device. | ||
127 | Note that it is important to set the device in /sys/power/resume, | ||
128 | regardless if resuming or not, otherwise later suspend will fail. | ||
129 | If resume starts, script execution terminates here. | ||
130 | |||
131 | Otherwise we just remove the encrypted swap device and leave it to the | ||
132 | mini system on /dev/hda1 to set the whole crypto up (it is up to | ||
133 | you to modify this to your taste). | ||
134 | |||
135 | What then follows is the well known process to change the root | ||
136 | file system and continue booting from there. I prefer to unmount | ||
137 | the initrd prior to continue booting but it is up to you to modify | ||
138 | this. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt index 7a6b78966459..b0d50840788e 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt | |||
@@ -1,22 +1,20 @@ | |||
1 | From kernel/suspend.c: | 1 | Some warnings, first. |
2 | 2 | ||
3 | * BIG FAT WARNING ********************************************************* | 3 | * BIG FAT WARNING ********************************************************* |
4 | * | 4 | * |
5 | * If you have unsupported (*) devices using DMA... | ||
6 | * ...say goodbye to your data. | ||
7 | * | ||
8 | * If you touch anything on disk between suspend and resume... | 5 | * If you touch anything on disk between suspend and resume... |
9 | * ...kiss your data goodbye. | 6 | * ...kiss your data goodbye. |
10 | * | 7 | * |
11 | * If your disk driver does not support suspend... (IDE does) | 8 | * If you do resume from initrd after your filesystems are mounted... |
12 | * ...you'd better find out how to get along | 9 | * ...bye bye root partition. |
13 | * without your data. | 10 | * [this is actually same case as above] |
14 | * | ||
15 | * If you change kernel command line between suspend and resume... | ||
16 | * ...prepare for nasty fsck or worse. | ||
17 | * | 11 | * |
18 | * If you change your hardware while system is suspended... | 12 | * If you have unsupported (*) devices using DMA, you may have some |
19 | * ...well, it was not good idea. | 13 | * problems. If your disk driver does not support suspend... (IDE does), |
14 | * it may cause some problems, too. If you change kernel command line | ||
15 | * between suspend and resume, it may do something wrong. If you change | ||
16 | * your hardware while system is suspended... well, it was not good idea; | ||
17 | * but it will probably only crash. | ||
20 | * | 18 | * |
21 | * (*) suspend/resume support is needed to make it safe. | 19 | * (*) suspend/resume support is needed to make it safe. |
22 | 20 | ||
@@ -30,6 +28,13 @@ echo shutdown > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state | |||
30 | echo platform > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state | 28 | echo platform > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state |
31 | 29 | ||
32 | 30 | ||
31 | Encrypted suspend image: | ||
32 | ------------------------ | ||
33 | If you want to store your suspend image encrypted with a temporary | ||
34 | key to prevent data gathering after resume you must compile | ||
35 | crypto and the aes algorithm into the kernel - modules won't work | ||
36 | as they cannot be loaded at resume time. | ||
37 | |||
33 | 38 | ||
34 | Article about goals and implementation of Software Suspend for Linux | 39 | Article about goals and implementation of Software Suspend for Linux |
35 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | 40 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ |
@@ -85,11 +90,6 @@ resume. | |||
85 | You have your server on UPS. Power died, and UPS is indicating 30 | 90 | You have your server on UPS. Power died, and UPS is indicating 30 |
86 | seconds to failure. What do you do? Suspend to disk. | 91 | seconds to failure. What do you do? Suspend to disk. |
87 | 92 | ||
88 | Ethernet card in your server died. You want to replace it. Your | ||
89 | server is not hotplug capable. What do you do? Suspend to disk, | ||
90 | replace ethernet card, resume. If you are fast your users will not | ||
91 | even see broken connections. | ||
92 | |||
93 | 93 | ||
94 | Q: Maybe I'm missing something, but why don't the regular I/O paths work? | 94 | Q: Maybe I'm missing something, but why don't the regular I/O paths work? |
95 | 95 | ||
@@ -117,31 +117,6 @@ Q: Does linux support ACPI S4? | |||
117 | 117 | ||
118 | A: Yes. That's what echo platform > /sys/power/disk does. | 118 | A: Yes. That's what echo platform > /sys/power/disk does. |
119 | 119 | ||
120 | Q: My machine doesn't work with ACPI. How can I use swsusp than ? | ||
121 | |||
122 | A: Do a reboot() syscall with right parameters. Warning: glibc gets in | ||
123 | its way, so check with strace: | ||
124 | |||
125 | reboot(LINUX_REBOOT_MAGIC1, LINUX_REBOOT_MAGIC2, 0xd000fce2) | ||
126 | |||
127 | (Thanks to Peter Osterlund:) | ||
128 | |||
129 | #include <unistd.h> | ||
130 | #include <syscall.h> | ||
131 | |||
132 | #define LINUX_REBOOT_MAGIC1 0xfee1dead | ||
133 | #define LINUX_REBOOT_MAGIC2 672274793 | ||
134 | #define LINUX_REBOOT_CMD_SW_SUSPEND 0xD000FCE2 | ||
135 | |||
136 | int main() | ||
137 | { | ||
138 | syscall(SYS_reboot, LINUX_REBOOT_MAGIC1, LINUX_REBOOT_MAGIC2, | ||
139 | LINUX_REBOOT_CMD_SW_SUSPEND, 0); | ||
140 | return 0; | ||
141 | } | ||
142 | |||
143 | Also /sys/ interface should be still present. | ||
144 | |||
145 | Q: What is 'suspend2'? | 120 | Q: What is 'suspend2'? |
146 | 121 | ||
147 | A: suspend2 is 'Software Suspend 2', a forked implementation of | 122 | A: suspend2 is 'Software Suspend 2', a forked implementation of |
@@ -311,3 +286,46 @@ As a rule of thumb use encrypted swap to protect your data while your | |||
311 | system is shut down or suspended. Additionally use the encrypted | 286 | system is shut down or suspended. Additionally use the encrypted |
312 | suspend image to prevent sensitive data from being stolen after | 287 | suspend image to prevent sensitive data from being stolen after |
313 | resume. | 288 | resume. |
289 | |||
290 | Q: Why can't we suspend to a swap file? | ||
291 | |||
292 | A: Because accessing swap file needs the filesystem mounted, and | ||
293 | filesystem might do something wrong (like replaying the journal) | ||
294 | during mount. | ||
295 | |||
296 | There are few ways to get that fixed: | ||
297 | |||
298 | 1) Probably could be solved by modifying every filesystem to support | ||
299 | some kind of "really read-only!" option. Patches welcome. | ||
300 | |||
301 | 2) suspend2 gets around that by storing absolute positions in on-disk | ||
302 | image (and blocksize), with resume parameter pointing directly to | ||
303 | suspend header. | ||
304 | |||
305 | Q: Is there a maximum system RAM size that is supported by swsusp? | ||
306 | |||
307 | A: It should work okay with highmem. | ||
308 | |||
309 | Q: Does swsusp (to disk) use only one swap partition or can it use | ||
310 | multiple swap partitions (aggregate them into one logical space)? | ||
311 | |||
312 | A: Only one swap partition, sorry. | ||
313 | |||
314 | Q: If my application(s) causes lots of memory & swap space to be used | ||
315 | (over half of the total system RAM), is it correct that it is likely | ||
316 | to be useless to try to suspend to disk while that app is running? | ||
317 | |||
318 | A: No, it should work okay, as long as your app does not mlock() | ||
319 | it. Just prepare big enough swap partition. | ||
320 | |||
321 | Q: What information is usefull for debugging suspend-to-disk problems? | ||
322 | |||
323 | A: Well, last messages on the screen are always useful. If something | ||
324 | is broken, it is usually some kernel driver, therefore trying with as | ||
325 | little as possible modules loaded helps a lot. I also prefer people to | ||
326 | suspend from console, preferably without X running. Booting with | ||
327 | init=/bin/bash, then swapon and starting suspend sequence manually | ||
328 | usually does the trick. Then it is good idea to try with latest | ||
329 | vanilla kernel. | ||
330 | |||
331 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/power/video.txt b/Documentation/power/video.txt index 7a4a5036d123..526d6dd267ea 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/video.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/video.txt | |||
@@ -46,6 +46,12 @@ There are a few types of systems where video works after S3 resume: | |||
46 | POSTing bios works. Ole Rohne has patch to do just that at | 46 | POSTing bios works. Ole Rohne has patch to do just that at |
47 | http://dev.gentoo.org/~marineam/patch-radeonfb-2.6.11-rc2-mm2. | 47 | http://dev.gentoo.org/~marineam/patch-radeonfb-2.6.11-rc2-mm2. |
48 | 48 | ||
49 | (8) on some systems, you can use the video_post utility mentioned here: | ||
50 | http://bugzilla.kernel.org/show_bug.cgi?id=3670. Do echo 3 > /sys/power/state | ||
51 | && /usr/sbin/video_post - which will initialize the display in console mode. | ||
52 | If you are in X, you can switch to a virtual terminal and back to X using | ||
53 | CTRL+ALT+F1 - CTRL+ALT+F7 to get the display working in graphical mode again. | ||
54 | |||
49 | Now, if you pass acpi_sleep=something, and it does not work with your | 55 | Now, if you pass acpi_sleep=something, and it does not work with your |
50 | bios, you'll get a hard crash during resume. Be careful. Also it is | 56 | bios, you'll get a hard crash during resume. Be careful. Also it is |
51 | safest to do your experiments with plain old VGA console. The vesafb | 57 | safest to do your experiments with plain old VGA console. The vesafb |
@@ -64,7 +70,8 @@ Model hack (or "how to do it") | |||
64 | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | 70 | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
65 | Acer Aspire 1406LC ole's late BIOS init (7), turn off DRI | 71 | Acer Aspire 1406LC ole's late BIOS init (7), turn off DRI |
66 | Acer TM 242FX vbetool (6) | 72 | Acer TM 242FX vbetool (6) |
67 | Acer TM C300 vga=normal (only suspend on console, not in X), vbetool (6) | 73 | Acer TM C110 video_post (8) |
74 | Acer TM C300 vga=normal (only suspend on console, not in X), vbetool (6) or video_post (8) | ||
68 | Acer TM 4052LCi s3_bios (2) | 75 | Acer TM 4052LCi s3_bios (2) |
69 | Acer TM 636Lci s3_bios vga=normal (2) | 76 | Acer TM 636Lci s3_bios vga=normal (2) |
70 | Acer TM 650 (Radeon M7) vga=normal plus boot-radeon (5) gets text console back | 77 | Acer TM 650 (Radeon M7) vga=normal plus boot-radeon (5) gets text console back |
@@ -113,6 +120,7 @@ IBM ThinkPad T42p (2373-GTG) s3_bios (2) | |||
113 | IBM TP X20 ??? (*) | 120 | IBM TP X20 ??? (*) |
114 | IBM TP X30 s3_bios (2) | 121 | IBM TP X30 s3_bios (2) |
115 | IBM TP X31 / Type 2672-XXH none (1), use radeontool (http://fdd.com/software/radeon/) to turn off backlight. | 122 | IBM TP X31 / Type 2672-XXH none (1), use radeontool (http://fdd.com/software/radeon/) to turn off backlight. |
123 | IBM TP X32 none (1), but backlight is on and video is trashed after long suspend | ||
116 | IBM Thinkpad X40 Type 2371-7JG s3_bios,s3_mode (4) | 124 | IBM Thinkpad X40 Type 2371-7JG s3_bios,s3_mode (4) |
117 | Medion MD4220 ??? (*) | 125 | Medion MD4220 ??? (*) |
118 | Samsung P35 vbetool needed (6) | 126 | Samsung P35 vbetool needed (6) |
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx.txt index 160e7354cd1e..47e74ddc4bc9 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx.txt | |||
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ | |||
1 | ==================================================================== | 1 | ==================================================================== |
2 | = Adaptec Aic7xxx Fast -> Ultra160 Family Manager Set v6.2.28 = | 2 | = Adaptec Aic7xxx Fast -> Ultra160 Family Manager Set v7.0 = |
3 | = README for = | 3 | = README for = |
4 | = The Linux Operating System = | 4 | = The Linux Operating System = |
5 | ==================================================================== | 5 | ==================================================================== |
@@ -131,6 +131,10 @@ The following information is available in this file: | |||
131 | SCSI "stub" effects. | 131 | SCSI "stub" effects. |
132 | 132 | ||
133 | 2. Version History | 133 | 2. Version History |
134 | 7.0 (4th August, 2005) | ||
135 | - Updated driver to use SCSI transport class infrastructure | ||
136 | - Upported sequencer and core fixes from last adaptec released | ||
137 | version of the driver. | ||
134 | 6.2.36 (June 3rd, 2003) | 138 | 6.2.36 (June 3rd, 2003) |
135 | - Correct code that disables PCI parity error checking. | 139 | - Correct code that disables PCI parity error checking. |
136 | - Correct and simplify handling of the ignore wide residue | 140 | - Correct and simplify handling of the ignore wide residue |
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt index 7536823c0cb1..44df89c9c049 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt | |||
@@ -373,13 +373,11 @@ Summary: | |||
373 | scsi_activate_tcq - turn on tag command queueing | 373 | scsi_activate_tcq - turn on tag command queueing |
374 | scsi_add_device - creates new scsi device (lu) instance | 374 | scsi_add_device - creates new scsi device (lu) instance |
375 | scsi_add_host - perform sysfs registration and SCSI bus scan. | 375 | scsi_add_host - perform sysfs registration and SCSI bus scan. |
376 | scsi_add_timer - (re-)start timer on a SCSI command. | ||
377 | scsi_adjust_queue_depth - change the queue depth on a SCSI device | 376 | scsi_adjust_queue_depth - change the queue depth on a SCSI device |
378 | scsi_assign_lock - replace default host_lock with given lock | 377 | scsi_assign_lock - replace default host_lock with given lock |
379 | scsi_bios_ptable - return copy of block device's partition table | 378 | scsi_bios_ptable - return copy of block device's partition table |
380 | scsi_block_requests - prevent further commands being queued to given host | 379 | scsi_block_requests - prevent further commands being queued to given host |
381 | scsi_deactivate_tcq - turn off tag command queueing | 380 | scsi_deactivate_tcq - turn off tag command queueing |
382 | scsi_delete_timer - cancel timer on a SCSI command. | ||
383 | scsi_host_alloc - return a new scsi_host instance whose refcount==1 | 381 | scsi_host_alloc - return a new scsi_host instance whose refcount==1 |
384 | scsi_host_get - increments Scsi_Host instance's refcount | 382 | scsi_host_get - increments Scsi_Host instance's refcount |
385 | scsi_host_put - decrements Scsi_Host instance's refcount (free if 0) | 383 | scsi_host_put - decrements Scsi_Host instance's refcount (free if 0) |
@@ -458,27 +456,6 @@ int scsi_add_host(struct Scsi_Host *shost, struct device * dev) | |||
458 | 456 | ||
459 | 457 | ||
460 | /** | 458 | /** |
461 | * scsi_add_timer - (re-)start timer on a SCSI command. | ||
462 | * @scmd: pointer to scsi command instance | ||
463 | * @timeout: duration of timeout in "jiffies" | ||
464 | * @complete: pointer to function to call if timeout expires | ||
465 | * | ||
466 | * Returns nothing | ||
467 | * | ||
468 | * Might block: no | ||
469 | * | ||
470 | * Notes: Each scsi command has its own timer, and as it is added | ||
471 | * to the queue, we set up the timer. When the command completes, | ||
472 | * we cancel the timer. An LLD can use this function to change | ||
473 | * the existing timeout value. | ||
474 | * | ||
475 | * Defined in: drivers/scsi/scsi_error.c | ||
476 | **/ | ||
477 | void scsi_add_timer(struct scsi_cmnd *scmd, int timeout, | ||
478 | void (*complete)(struct scsi_cmnd *)) | ||
479 | |||
480 | |||
481 | /** | ||
482 | * scsi_adjust_queue_depth - allow LLD to change queue depth on a SCSI device | 459 | * scsi_adjust_queue_depth - allow LLD to change queue depth on a SCSI device |
483 | * @sdev: pointer to SCSI device to change queue depth on | 460 | * @sdev: pointer to SCSI device to change queue depth on |
484 | * @tagged: 0 - no tagged queuing | 461 | * @tagged: 0 - no tagged queuing |
@@ -566,24 +543,6 @@ void scsi_deactivate_tcq(struct scsi_device *sdev, int depth) | |||
566 | 543 | ||
567 | 544 | ||
568 | /** | 545 | /** |
569 | * scsi_delete_timer - cancel timer on a SCSI command. | ||
570 | * @scmd: pointer to scsi command instance | ||
571 | * | ||
572 | * Returns 1 if able to cancel timer else 0 (i.e. too late or already | ||
573 | * cancelled). | ||
574 | * | ||
575 | * Might block: no [may in the future if it invokes del_timer_sync()] | ||
576 | * | ||
577 | * Notes: All commands issued by upper levels already have a timeout | ||
578 | * associated with them. An LLD can use this function to cancel the | ||
579 | * timer. | ||
580 | * | ||
581 | * Defined in: drivers/scsi/scsi_error.c | ||
582 | **/ | ||
583 | int scsi_delete_timer(struct scsi_cmnd *scmd) | ||
584 | |||
585 | |||
586 | /** | ||
587 | * scsi_host_alloc - create a scsi host adapter instance and perform basic | 546 | * scsi_host_alloc - create a scsi host adapter instance and perform basic |
588 | * initialization. | 547 | * initialization. |
589 | * @sht: pointer to scsi host template | 548 | * @sht: pointer to scsi host template |
diff --git a/Documentation/sonypi.txt b/Documentation/sonypi.txt index 0f3b2405d09e..c1237a925505 100644 --- a/Documentation/sonypi.txt +++ b/Documentation/sonypi.txt | |||
@@ -99,6 +99,7 @@ statically linked into the kernel). Those options are: | |||
99 | SONYPI_MEYE_MASK 0x0400 | 99 | SONYPI_MEYE_MASK 0x0400 |
100 | SONYPI_MEMORYSTICK_MASK 0x0800 | 100 | SONYPI_MEMORYSTICK_MASK 0x0800 |
101 | SONYPI_BATTERY_MASK 0x1000 | 101 | SONYPI_BATTERY_MASK 0x1000 |
102 | SONYPI_WIRELESS_MASK 0x2000 | ||
102 | 103 | ||
103 | useinput: if set (which is the default) two input devices are | 104 | useinput: if set (which is the default) two input devices are |
104 | created, one which interprets the jogdial events as | 105 | created, one which interprets the jogdial events as |
@@ -137,6 +138,15 @@ Bugs: | |||
137 | speed handling etc). Use ACPI instead of APM if it works on your | 138 | speed handling etc). Use ACPI instead of APM if it works on your |
138 | laptop. | 139 | laptop. |
139 | 140 | ||
141 | - sonypi lacks the ability to distinguish between certain key | ||
142 | events on some models. | ||
143 | |||
144 | - some models with the nvidia card (geforce go 6200 tc) uses a | ||
145 | different way to adjust the backlighting of the screen. There | ||
146 | is a userspace utility to adjust the brightness on those models, | ||
147 | which can be downloaded from | ||
148 | http://www.acc.umu.se/~erikw/program/smartdimmer-0.1.tar.bz2 | ||
149 | |||
140 | - since all development was done by reverse engineering, there is | 150 | - since all development was done by reverse engineering, there is |
141 | _absolutely no guarantee_ that this driver will not crash your | 151 | _absolutely no guarantee_ that this driver will not crash your |
142 | laptop. Permanently. | 152 | laptop. Permanently. |
diff --git a/Documentation/sparse.txt b/Documentation/sparse.txt index f97841478459..5df44dc894e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/sparse.txt +++ b/Documentation/sparse.txt | |||
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ With BK, you can just get it from | |||
57 | 57 | ||
58 | and DaveJ has tar-balls at | 58 | and DaveJ has tar-balls at |
59 | 59 | ||
60 | http://www.codemonkey.org.uk/projects/bitkeeper/sparse/ | 60 | http://www.codemonkey.org.uk/projects/git-snapshots/sparse/ |
61 | 61 | ||
62 | 62 | ||
63 | Once you have it, just do | 63 | Once you have it, just do |
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv index 62a12a08e2ac..ec785f9f15a3 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv | |||
@@ -126,10 +126,12 @@ card=124 - AverMedia AverTV DVB-T 761 | |||
126 | card=125 - MATRIX Vision Sigma-SQ | 126 | card=125 - MATRIX Vision Sigma-SQ |
127 | card=126 - MATRIX Vision Sigma-SLC | 127 | card=126 - MATRIX Vision Sigma-SLC |
128 | card=127 - APAC Viewcomp 878(AMAX) | 128 | card=127 - APAC Viewcomp 878(AMAX) |
129 | card=128 - DVICO FusionHDTV DVB-T Lite | 129 | card=128 - DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Lite |
130 | card=129 - V-Gear MyVCD | 130 | card=129 - V-Gear MyVCD |
131 | card=130 - Super TV Tuner | 131 | card=130 - Super TV Tuner |
132 | card=131 - Tibet Systems 'Progress DVR' CS16 | 132 | card=131 - Tibet Systems 'Progress DVR' CS16 |
133 | card=132 - Kodicom 4400R (master) | 133 | card=132 - Kodicom 4400R (master) |
134 | card=133 - Kodicom 4400R (slave) | 134 | card=133 - Kodicom 4400R (slave) |
135 | card=134 - Adlink RTV24 | 135 | card=134 - Adlink RTV24 |
136 | card=135 - DViCO FusionHDTV 5 Lite | ||
137 | card=136 - Acorp Y878F | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 1b5a3a9ffbe2..dc57225f39be 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | |||
@@ -62,3 +62,6 @@ | |||
62 | 61 -> Philips TOUGH DVB-T reference design [1131:2004] | 62 | 61 -> Philips TOUGH DVB-T reference design [1131:2004] |
63 | 62 -> Compro VideoMate TV Gold+II | 63 | 62 -> Compro VideoMate TV Gold+II |
64 | 63 -> Kworld Xpert TV PVR7134 | 64 | 63 -> Kworld Xpert TV PVR7134 |
65 | 64 -> FlyTV mini Asus Digimatrix [1043:0210,1043:0210] | ||
66 | 65 -> V-Stream Studio TV Terminator | ||
67 | 66 -> Yuan TUN-900 (saa7135) | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner index f3302e1b1b9c..f5876be658a6 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner | |||
@@ -64,3 +64,4 @@ tuner=62 - Philips TEA5767HN FM Radio | |||
64 | tuner=63 - Philips FMD1216ME MK3 Hybrid Tuner | 64 | tuner=63 - Philips FMD1216ME MK3 Hybrid Tuner |
65 | tuner=64 - LG TDVS-H062F/TUA6034 | 65 | tuner=64 - LG TDVS-H062F/TUA6034 |
66 | tuner=65 - Ymec TVF66T5-B/DFF | 66 | tuner=65 - Ymec TVF66T5-B/DFF |
67 | tuner=66 - LG NTSC (TALN mini series) | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/locking b/Documentation/vm/locking index c3ef09ae3bb1..f366fa956179 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/locking +++ b/Documentation/vm/locking | |||
@@ -83,19 +83,18 @@ single address space optimization, so that the zap_page_range (from | |||
83 | vmtruncate) does not lose sending ipi's to cloned threads that might | 83 | vmtruncate) does not lose sending ipi's to cloned threads that might |
84 | be spawned underneath it and go to user mode to drag in pte's into tlbs. | 84 | be spawned underneath it and go to user mode to drag in pte's into tlbs. |
85 | 85 | ||
86 | swap_list_lock/swap_device_lock | 86 | swap_lock |
87 | ------------------------------- | 87 | -------------- |
88 | The swap devices are chained in priority order from the "swap_list" header. | 88 | The swap devices are chained in priority order from the "swap_list" header. |
89 | The "swap_list" is used for the round-robin swaphandle allocation strategy. | 89 | The "swap_list" is used for the round-robin swaphandle allocation strategy. |
90 | The #free swaphandles is maintained in "nr_swap_pages". These two together | 90 | The #free swaphandles is maintained in "nr_swap_pages". These two together |
91 | are protected by the swap_list_lock. | 91 | are protected by the swap_lock. |
92 | 92 | ||
93 | The swap_device_lock, which is per swap device, protects the reference | 93 | The swap_lock also protects all the device reference counts on the |
94 | counts on the corresponding swaphandles, maintained in the "swap_map" | 94 | corresponding swaphandles, maintained in the "swap_map" array, and the |
95 | array, and the "highest_bit" and "lowest_bit" fields. | 95 | "highest_bit" and "lowest_bit" fields. |
96 | 96 | ||
97 | Both of these are spinlocks, and are never acquired from intr level. The | 97 | The swap_lock is a spinlock, and is never acquired from intr level. |
98 | locking hierarchy is swap_list_lock -> swap_device_lock. | ||
99 | 98 | ||
100 | To prevent races between swap space deletion or async readahead swapins | 99 | To prevent races between swap space deletion or async readahead swapins |
101 | deciding whether a swap handle is being used, ie worthy of being read in | 100 | deciding whether a swap handle is being used, ie worthy of being read in |
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt index 28388aa700c6..c5beb548cfc4 100644 --- a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt | |||
@@ -228,6 +228,26 @@ advantechwdt.c -- Advantech Single Board Computer | |||
228 | The GETSTATUS call returns if the device is open or not. | 228 | The GETSTATUS call returns if the device is open or not. |
229 | [FIXME -- silliness again?] | 229 | [FIXME -- silliness again?] |
230 | 230 | ||
231 | booke_wdt.c -- PowerPC BookE Watchdog Timer | ||
232 | |||
233 | Timeout default varies according to frequency, supports | ||
234 | SETTIMEOUT | ||
235 | |||
236 | Watchdog can not be turned off, CONFIG_WATCHDOG_NOWAYOUT | ||
237 | does not make sense | ||
238 | |||
239 | GETSUPPORT returns the watchdog_info struct, and | ||
240 | GETSTATUS returns the supported options. GETBOOTSTATUS | ||
241 | returns a 1 if the last reset was caused by the | ||
242 | watchdog and a 0 otherwise. This watchdog can not be | ||
243 | disabled once it has been started. The wdt_period kernel | ||
244 | parameter selects which bit of the time base changing | ||
245 | from 0->1 will trigger the watchdog exception. Changing | ||
246 | the timeout from the ioctl calls will change the | ||
247 | wdt_period as defined above. Finally if you would like to | ||
248 | replace the default Watchdog Handler you can implement the | ||
249 | WatchdogHandler() function in your own code. | ||
250 | |||
231 | eurotechwdt.c -- Eurotech CPU-1220/1410 | 251 | eurotechwdt.c -- Eurotech CPU-1220/1410 |
232 | 252 | ||
233 | The timeout can be set using the SETTIMEOUT ioctl and defaults | 253 | The timeout can be set using the SETTIMEOUT ioctl and defaults |